13... ‘
1.63;: 3:33 :

 

 

 

 

i ’11 MN?

SIXI’ICNI'IVI JION ’I'" L I‘,

'l' H E

SUNDAY AT HOME.

“The SUNDAY AT HOME is made f01 Sunday roading,h11t thvrois,
nevertheless, nothing vapid, goody-goody, ur childish ulmut it. but
rather writing and story—telling oi" unquestionalilv 111111 it. nbi'mnsly
done by skilled hands, and put together by :1 minpctrnl' 21ml
cxpcrienccd editor."~Mcdu;al Press.

“The SUNDAY AT HOME omes itsnll~ {in thosv \<1\ hnnrs \\l11« ii
are most at command with the mass oi busy “()1 ki 11. to \\1 lIUIll (in
quiet aitm noon ol the day 01 hol_\ [‘1‘ st aflords 1111 p1 incipzil ummr
tunity they enjoy lot pozuxtul11.11ling11nil 111.111 thought. i\ HHIRL
useful magazine."———Prcsl{ylerum Mrssvnger.

” Full of interesting and ('111'11i'ully written papvrs " ~ Spa/1m"

“ Them are few magazines of its class thin .ne 1114111 thmnuishly
in keeping with the sacred chaiactcr ut tin l .'(1r(l s D1115 Chum/1
and People.

“Amidst the active competition 0! thrsv (lil\S lhe SUNn-u Al
lluME still keeps its place as 11 tinstwmllu niagunnz tm humhu
11ml gcneial r.cading' ——T/Ie RW‘Laid.

" In the front rank of rolig‘inus magzizini-s lid/nulls! [Inn’s

“More than any pc1i01lic11l \\1-k111>\\ it lull\1.ui~,-1\iis tln~ 1h
scription in both its pails; it is .1 l:11nil\ iliagzuim — illls‘ullllf' Iy 1111111
and g00d,andthii'1( IS nothingr 111 it \\lll( l1 iz'11 s u 1th 511ml. 1\ lhuu'v ht
:111clw0rsl1ip.' London ()mulm/v Revuw.

'l‘ H F.

fianbag at 350m @nnuat’.

THE YEARLY VOLUME OF THE SUNDAY
RT HOME.

Containing great variety oi intc1C5t1ng 11ml 11:.c1l11l wailing
for every member of the family. lllustralml with ( uluuiml

Pictures and a l’rot'nsinn ul' \Numl Engraving»

7s. 61]. ('LOT" IHLIRIIN.

l’i'nLisHEn AT 50, l’A'i'ERanrkk Rim. l.(>i\‘l><)N;
A Mi .So/d by all Bombay/Ins.

-~r: 7r: .4!" ’ mid, _. _ w

     
 
 

 

 

 

 

mm:," ‘

E4“. . A

e;—

  

 
 
   
  
   
  
  

 

 

¢ompamons fOt

a ®uiet

our. '1

 

LORIYS ’I‘J BLE: Medita-
tions and Prayers from Ancii- -11t and Mode-111 Authors. W'ith
an Intloduction on the meaning of the Lord 5 bupptr. 15 6d.

“ It ransacks the Christian literature of all agt s for appl opr iate
meditations and rayers, and the result 15 a book of a most cdify-

1. A COJIPANION TO THE

ing character. e heartily commend it. "—Edin. Dailv Rama.
2. PRAIVATE THOUGHTS 0N RELIGION. By THOMAS
DAAM. IS. 6d. cloth boa1ds.

“ Full of religious thought and feeling‘ '—Chrt"stmn World.

A N INFA LLIBLE WA Y TO (70 NTE VTM’E VT. A
neat little reprint from an old writer. 15. 6d. cloth boards.

" A small volume of rare merit."—(‘lzristian.

“ A dainty little book."—Shn_flield Independent.

LUTHER’S TABLE TA LK. Selected by Dr.
IS. 6d. cloth.

“ A capital little volume."—R0ck.

“ A handy and well-arranged manual. '—Qu¢en

“ A judictous selection. M—Engllsh Churchman.

. .4 COLLECTION OF THE PROMISES OF SCRIP-
TURE. Ananged under their pr'ope1 heads. By SAMUEL
CLARK, D. D. IS. 6d. cloth boards.

A new and elegant edition of a well-known book.

6. THE ANXIOUS INQUIRER AFTFR SALIATION
DIRECTED AND EVCOURA GED. By IOHN ANGELL
jAMEs. IS. 6d. cloth boar.ds Cheap Edition, 6d. cloth;
3d. paper covers.

7. SONGS OF SPIRITUA L THOUGHT. By
wson. 15. 6d. cloth boards.
This httle book contains some of Gemge Rawson’ s best- known
hymns, but also a considerable number that have never appeared
tore

8. HYMNS OF THE PRESENT CENT! RY. Translated
from the German bytthe late Rev. IOHN KL! LY. 15.611.
“A choice little volume; a distinct 'addition to hymnology.’—-
Indcpcndent.

9. THE BEA TITUDES.
IS. 6d. cloth boards.
“ No one can read a single page without being struck by some
weight1 remark. lucidly couched suggestio11,or piercing appeal.
English Clzurchmun.

10. TIIE' THREEFOLI) LII‘F. 01. The Walk the ka, and
the Wa1ia1e B1 tln Rev.Boun111110x.15.6rl cloth
“ Abounding as it does 111 practical counsels the fruit ofa ripe
Cl’ll istian exper ience. the little volume will prove of great 5121' v1ce
to Christ’s soldiers and servants. "—Lilmmy World.

‘1"

MACAULAY.

.5.

Lil

GEORGE

By Roy. RICHARD CLOVER, D.D.

PUBLISHED AT 56. PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON;
And Sold by all Booksellers.

 

 

  

 

 

 

./‘;,/A/....u LO A/HZg/wv ENC. ./,.C/ 774

 

 

 

         

IDNDON

THE RELIGIOUS TRACT SOCIEIY

55, PATERNOSTER ROW- 55, ST. PAULS CHURCHYARD X.
f " , - _ AND 164,PICCADILLY

91392» ~ 7 .

 

 

 

a

1")?!"

-.w

:1

 

THE STORY OF UGANDA

AND THE

VICTORIA NYANZA [MISSION

BY

SARAH GERALDINA

 

WITH A JIAP AND ILLUSTRATIONS

LONDON

THE RELIGIOUS TRACT SOCIETY

56, PATERNOSTER ROW; 65, ST. PAUL’S CHURCHYARD
AND 164, PICCADILLY

1892.

 

 

1’7

Lia’s-$75

INTRODUCTION.

‘ A POSSESSION of a burying-place’ was the first

thing acquired by the patriarch of old in the
land which was promised to him and to his heirs for
ever. A woman's funeral inaugurated the beginning
of Abraham’s ownership in Canaan. As the mournful
procession passed up the field and beneath the spread-
ing trees of Machpelah, to the cave which was to be
Sarah’s last earthly resting-place, did there pass before
the tear-dimmed eyes of her husband a vision of the
future, when one of his children’s children should be
crowned as king in the neighbouring city of Hebron ?
Under the teaching of the Spirit of God he looked for
something even higher—for a ‘city which hath foun-
dations, whose Builder and Maker is God.’ Yet the
purpose of God was to be fulfilled literally. And as
the long years passed away, others beside Sarah were
interred in the same spot, while the body of Jacob’s
beloved wife Rachel. was laid to rest some miles
further north, at Bethlehem. These graves were as
a seal set upon the land of Canaan, marking it out as
the inheritance of the people whom God had chosen.
And although the Israelites grew into a nation, lived,
died, and were buried in Egypt, the body of him under
whose auspices they had settled in that country was

5

8'? t

6 INTRODUCTION.

kept, embalmed and uninterred, until the time came
when it should belaid to rest in the land, no more of
Canaan, but of Israel.

Pass over 3,200 years (in round numbers), and look
at the funeral of another woman, the wife of a ‘stranger
in a strange land.’ A solitary mourner, in much bodily
weakness, follows the coffin up the sandy beach, and
a little farther on, under the shade of the palms and
mangoes, the body of Rosine Krapf is laid to rest, the
waters of Mombasa inlet chanting the requiem, while
the blue hills of Rabai and of Shimba looked down
upon the novel sight of a Christian burial. Here is
the first occupation of East Africa by a servant of
Christ. On that day the land was taken possession
of in the name of Him whose rightful inheritance it
is. A day or two after her motherless babe was
buried in the same place. But the bereaved husband
and father, steeped in sorrow, yet strong in faith, wrote
thus concerning the hallowed spot :—

‘Tell our friends that there is on the liast African
coast a lonely grave of a member of the Mission cause
connected with your Society. This is a sign that you
have commenced the struggle with this part of the
world; and as the victories of the Church are gained
by stepping over the graves of many of her members,

you may be the more convinced that the hour is at hand
i when you are summoned to the conversion of Africa
from its eastern shore.’

A few years later, up among the hills of Rabai, there
is another funeral. The piece of ground newly pur-
chased of the Wanika by Krapf’s fellow-labourer,
Rebmann, is hallowed by the interment there of the
young missionary Pfiefferle, whose life has been given

INTRODUCTION. 7

for the Redeemer’s cause in these regions. And once
more Krapf takes his pen and writes, not in the
language of despondency, but of hope and courage :—

‘ The first resident of the new Mission ground is a
dead person of the missionary circle. Our God bids
us first build a cemetery before we build a church or
dwelling-house; showing us by this lesson that the
resurrection of East Africa must be effected by our
own destruction.’

Yet for some time longer the conquest of East Africa
for Christ seems almost at a standstill. Krapf, worn
out with labours and hardships, returns to Europe, and
occupies himself with linguistic work. Rebmann grows
old, infirm, and blind at his post, but will not leave it.
Both have their eyes fixed on the goal, which to most
men would have seemed a mere idle vision, the setting
up of Christ’s kingdom, not only on the coast, but in
the interior of this vast country, knowing that His
mark is on the land, in the graves of His faithful
servants.

And at length the time comes for the purpose of
God to be fulfilled. Close to that solitary grave on
the shore a Mission settlement is planted. Round
about that grave on the heights another settlement
grows and flourishes. In Frere Town and in Kisulutini
the Word of God is taught, and souls are won for the
Saviour. A part of the land has been conquered for
Christ.

Look back now once more at Israelitish history. The
time at length comes for the conquest of the land of
Canaan by the hosts of the Lord. The Jordan is
crossed, and Jericho and Ai taken by storm. And this
first foothold being gained in the land, Joshua and the

8 INTRODUCTION.

Israelites prOCeed to do what under ordinary circum-
stances would have seemed a most foolish thing, and
have probably brought upon them defeat and destruc-
tion. Instead of advancing carefully, step by step,
they march ‘boldly forward into the very centre of the
country, not to erect a strong fort, but to set up an
altar to God, and write on the stones a copy of His law.
In the lovely valley of Shechem, in the midst of that
hostile and heathen country, the solemn assembly is
held, and from the opposite hills the blessings for the
obedient and the curses for the disobedient are pro—
nounced. This was done in no mere bravado, but
at the express command of God, given some months
before. They ‘made haste, and delayed not, to keep
His commandments.’ And they found obedience the
path to victory.

We find a parallel to this in the action of the Church
Missionary Society in East Africa. Having obtained
a foothold on the coast, they proceeded to send a
missionary expedition into the heart of the country.
Instead of advancing gradually inland, they ventured
at once to occupy one of the countries on the shores
of the great inland sea known by the name of the
Victoria Nyanza, and this one of the most fertile,
wealthy, and powerful kingdoms of the whole continent.
It was in 1875 that Frere Town rose up on the coast
opposite Mombasa, as a refuge for liberated slaves, and
a place where they might be trained and educated.
And the very next year saw the little band set forth to
start a Mission on the Victoria Nyanza. It was in no
spirit of haste or of presumption that this step was
taken, but in obedience to what appeared to. the Church
Missionary Society Committee as a direct call from

INTRODUCTION. 9

God, coming to them through the remarkable chain of
events connected with the opening up of East Africa,
and the bringing to light the marvellous country of
Uganda. The advance was made into a strange land,
a land of heathen darkness, and there the Word of God
was introduced, and the law of God proclaimed. And
though the powers of hell have fought against it at
every step, that Word has held on its course, and has
been victorious over all opposition. It is 'a wondrous
story. And though the future of Uganda may look
uncertain, and dark clouds may loom over the bright—
ness which has risen on the land, we may and must
trust Him who has done the work to watch over and
uphold His own.

By the courtesy of Messrs. Sampson Low and Co.,
we are enabled to give the engravings of Rubaga, and
Mtesa and his chiefs.

 

CONTENTS.

PAGE

I. A CALL FROM AFAR . . . . . . 13
II. A LAND OF DARKNESS . . . . . 24
III. FROM THE SHORES OF ENGLAND TO NYANZA . 35
IV. THE GOAL REACHED . . . . . . 50
v. SOWING THE SEED AMID DIFFICULTIES . . 63
VI. THE SEED SPRINGING UP . . . . . 76
VII. THE BEGINNING OF I’ERSECUTION . . . 91
VIII. THE MARTYR BISHOP . . . '. . . 109
IX. THE GREAT PERSECUTION . . ‘ . . . 125
X. FRESH LABOURERS AND FRESH SORROWS . . I41
XI. THE REVOLUTION IN UGANDA . . . . I 57
XII. THE CHURCH IN EXILE . . . . . 172
X111. LABOUR AND REST BY THE LAKE . . . 186
XIV. A NEW ERA IN UGANDA . . . . . 204

II

    

j RUEAGA, THE CAPITAL 0F UGANDA .

" KING MTESA AND HIS CHIEFS . . .

o

THE HIGHLAND LASSIE LEAVING TEIGNMOUTH HARBOUR

DR. JOHN smm’s GRAVE VAT KAGEI .

THE c.u.s. FLEET ON THE VICTORIA NYANZA, 1877.

THE EXTERIOR OE MTESA’S TOMB . .
V THE INTERIOR OF MTESA’S TOMB . .
E15110? HANNINGTON . . . .
SCENE OF THE ExRST BOY MARTYRS’ DEATH
1 BISHOP HENRY PERROTT PARKER . .
A MWANGA, KING OF UGANDA . . .
THE mss1ON STATION AT USAMBIRO .
ALEXANDER m. MACKAY . . . .

GOD’S ACRE AT USAMBIRO . . .

BISHOP TUCKER AND THE UGANDA MISSIONARIES

PAGE

frontispiece

25
37
44
53
97
101
1 13
I33
148
I59
I75
189
200

207

 

 

 

EAS TERN CENTRAL

AFRICA

 

 

 

 

 

   

Muzrnvvnnge

»\

40°

 

“a ‘2
‘ BWERA kw
mcmw- 7? 1-“

 

s , H . Rn
K""‘ Kvlnbr.

o

J
11.5

' :me
:2 £5 3 VICTOR

 

[/31th
A NYA NZA

 

nirula- 0 Alice 1.
‘ .'J{ah'vu1:°

wkv "mn'Pt
,' I

 

l
§ .. . Stgg‘gy of due allll'dl Mkstbnag- Soaky

Scale of English Same Miles
0 20 4o 60 30 mo

1

E Eluator

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

{Rulxaga‘s
:° {URN/U

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

‘ Smn/brdlv Hmyflmzb‘ London.
_ Morlfissmns
M. Landau
U. .. Z7nivaqiuca
U M; UnilAiMf/wdutlhe flu

 

CHAPTER I.
A CALL FROM AFAR.
Ethiopia shall soon stretch out her hands unto God.’—PSALM lxviii. 3t.

HE existence of the now well—known Victoria
Nyanza, the vast inland sea lying 3,300 feet
above the level of the ocean, and occupying an area
larger than that of Scotland, was first made known to
the civilised world by Krapf, the pioneer missionary
of East Africa. It had indeed been spoken of some
hundreds of years earlier. In the second century the
geographer Ptolemy described the Nile as issuing from
two great lakes at the foot of the ‘Mountains of the
Moon.’ In the twelfth century the Arab geographer,
Aboulfeda, wrote of a lake which he called Koura,
lying under the Equator, and extending nine and a half
degrees from north to south, from which flowed the
three ‘Niles,’ or great rivers of Africa. Yet, in spite .
of this concurrent testimony to the existence of a large
mass or masses of water in the east central regions of
Africa, we find the newly-formed African Association,
in 1788, writing of that continent as ‘ penetrated by no
inland seas, nor overspread with extensive lakes, like
those of North America; nor having, in common with
other continents, rivers running from the centre to the
extremities.’
But in the year 1843, the vessel in which Dr. Krapf,
I3

I4 ‘ THE STORY OF UGANDA.

who had been compelled to relinquish his work in
Abyssinia, was travelling to Zanzibar, stopped at a
port called Takaunga, and here the missionary heard
the natives speak of a country in the interior called
‘ Uniamesi,’ where there was ‘a great lake.’ Krapf
continued his voyage to Zanzibar,.whence he afterwards
returned to Mombasa, and crossing over to the main-
land, began work in East Africa by starting, together
with Rebmann, a Mission station at Rabai, situated on
the hills, fifteen miles up a creek which runs inland
from Mombasa harbour. For some years he heard
nothing more of the lake. On one of the exploring
tours made by the missionaries Rebmann sighted, in
the year 1848, the snow-crowned mountain Kilima-
Njaro, the discovery of which caused much sensation
in geographical circles. In the following year Krapf
discovered the snow mountain Kenia, further to the
north—west. Two years later, in 185], when on a
journey in Ukambani, he met with a merchant who
again spoke to him of the great lake. This man told
him of a lake to the north—east of Mount Kenia, and
stated that it was connected by a river with a much
larger one, which had ‘no end, although one should
travel for a hundred days to see the end,’ and where
it was impossible to see across from shore to shore.
Still later on, Rebmann obtained further information
about it; and in 1855, the year of Krapf's return to
Europe, he sent to a German periodical, the (“a/wer-
Mz'ssz'oizs—B/atl, a map of the lake compiled by himself
and his companion Erhardt. The map was: put to-
gether from the details which had been given to the
missionaries by traders from the interior.

This curious map of the ‘Great Inland Sea of
Uniamesi’ was copied into the C/zm'r/z Miss/(wary
[Niel/gamer. It represents the ‘sea’ as extending

A CALI. FROM AFAR. 15

from the Equator to lat. 13° 5., extremely narrow at
the southern end, making about lat. 10° S. a sudden
bend to the westward, and again at lat. 8° S. another
bend to the northward, where it attains a width of five
degrees. It is thus made to occupy an area equal to
that of Lakes Nyassa, Tanganyika, and Victoria, with
much of the intervening country. The northern part
is called the ‘Sea of Ukerewe,’ and is pushed some
distance to the west of its actual position. There is
no mention in this map of any name that might answer
to the kingdom of Uganda, and it does not appear
that any rumours of such a. place had reached the
missionaries.

A large map, based on that of Rebmann and Erhardt,
was prepared and exhibited at the Royal Geographical
Society in I856. It naturally excited the greatest in—
terest and curiosity, and was the immediate cause of
the expedition of Burton and Speke in the following
year. These travellers discovered, instead of the
monster sea, two lakes, Tanganyika and the ‘Sea of
Ukerewe,’ to which Speke gave the name of the ‘Victoria
Nyanza’ (Nyanza or Nyassa meaning ‘sea ’). - Two
years later Lake Nyassa (which had been previously
known to the Portuguese) was reached by Livingstone.
And in 1861 Speke and Grant together explored the
Victoria Nyanza, and discovered the Nile flowing out
of it northward. This finally settled the question, so
long asked and so long unanswered, as to the original
source of the great river of Egypt. It was on this
occasion that the first white men visited Uganda,
where Speke resided as the guest of King Mtesa from
February to July I862.

In 1874 an officer of Colonel Gordon, then Governor
of the Egyptian Soudan, reached Uganda from the
north ; and in 1875 occurred Stanley’s memorable visit

16 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

to King Mtesa, when the great explorer was making
his way through the ‘Dark Continent.’ Between the
visits of Speke and Stanley, Mtesa, who is described by
the former as a volatile and frivolous youth, had grown
into an intelligent and dignified monarch. He had
come under the influence of Arab traders, and had
made a profession of Mohammedanism, which he also
enjoined on his principal chiefs. The country had
made some advance in outward civilisation. Stanley
writes :—

‘I landed amid a concourse of two thousand people,
who saluted me with a deafening volley of musketry
and waving of flags. Katakiro‘, the chief Mukungu, or
officer, in Uganda, then conducted me to comfortable
quarters, to which shortly afterwards were brought
sixteen goats, ten oxen, an immense quantity of
bananas, plantains, sweet potatoes, besides eggs,
chickens, milk, rice, ghee, and butter. After such a
royal and bountiful gift I felt more curiosity than ever
to see the generous monarch; and in the afternoon
Mtesa sent to say that he was ready to welcome me.
Issuing out of my quarters, I found myself in a broad
street eighty feet wide and half a mile long, which
was lined by his personal guards and attendants, his
captains and their respective retinues, to the number
of about three thousand. At the extreme end of this
street, and fronting it, was the king’s audience house,
in whose shadow I saw dimly the figure of the king
sitting in a chair. As I advanced towards him the
soldiers continued to fire their guns. The drums,
sixteen in number, beat out a fearful tempest of sound,
and the flags waved. Arrived before the audience
house the king rose—a tall and slender figure, dressed

‘ The traveller mistakes the title of Avril-fro, or chief minister, for
the name of the man holding the office.

A CALL FROM AFAR. 17

in Arab costume—approached me a few paces, held out
his hand mutely, while the drums continued their
terrible noise, and we stood silently gazing at each
other during a few minutes. But soon relieved from
the oppressive noise of the huge drums and the
hospitable violence of the many screaming discordant
fifes, I was invited to sit; Mtesa first showing the
example, followed by his great captains, about one
hundred in number.’

Stanley endeavoured to set before the king the claims
of Christianity, and with such success that Mtesa
determined to observe the Christian as well as the
Moslem Sabbath, and had the Ten Commandments
written for him in Arabic on a board, as well_as the
Lord's Prayer, and the ‘Golden Rule,’ ‘Thou shalt
love thy neighbour as thyself.’ He further desired to
have Christian teachers sent out to him, and the letter
from Mr. Stanley conveying this request appeared in
the Daily Telegraph in November 1875. This letter at
once attracted the attention of the Church Missionary
Committee.

Three days later the following letter was received by
the Lay Secretary of the Church Missionary Society :—

‘NOVEMBER 17,4875.

‘DEAR MR. HU'l'Cl-IINSON,—-

‘My eyes have often been strained wistfully
towards the interior of Africa, west of Mombasa, and
I have longed and prayed for the time when the Lord
would by His Providence open there a door of entrance
to the heralds of the Gospel.

‘The appeal of the energetic explorer Stanley to the
Christian Church from Mtesa’s capital, Uganda, taken
in connection with Colonel Gordon’s occupation of the

2

18 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

upper territories of the Nile, seems to me to indicate
that the time has come for the soldiers of the Cross to
make an advance into that region.

‘If the Committee of the Church Missionary Society
are prepared at once and with energy to organise a
mission to the Victoria Nyanza, I shall account it a
high privilege to place £5,000 at their disposal, as a
nucleus for the expenses of the undertaking.

‘I am not so sanguine as to look for the rapidity of
success contemplated by Mr. Stanley ; but if the Mission
be undertaken in simple and trustful dependence upon
the Lord of the Harvest, surely no insurmountable
difficulty need be anticipated, but His presence and
blessing be confidently expected, as we go forward in
obedience to the indications of His Providence and the
commands of His Word.

‘I only desire to be known in this matter as

‘AN UNPROFITABLI“. SERVANT.

‘(Luke xvii. IO).’

The call to advance into the interior of Africa now
seemed unmistakable. It was the hand of the mis-
sionary which had first drawn aside the dark curtain
enshrouding the country, and shown enough of what
lay beyond to tempt the feet of the explorer. Explora-
tion had resulted in a distinct request for teachers of
the Gospel. With however little consciousness of
what it really meant, Africa was indeed ‘stretching out
her hands unto God.’ The committee felt that this was
a call of Divine prompting, and they immediately
prepared to obey it. Another gift of £5,000 had
quickly followed the first, and in a short time the
sum of £24,000 was at their disposal for the under-
taking.

A CALL FROM AFAR. 19

The Divine Master had already been preparing the
pioneers of the' Mission for their arduous task. And
in the first ofier of service the interests of East and
West Africa were blended together in a remarkable
way, seeming to point onward to the time when the
glad tidings should sound right across the long~forsaken

continent, from coast to coast.

‘ The story of little Adjai’s rescue from the slave ship
in 1822 is well known to the friends of Missions. On
board the vessel which was the means of saving the
future ‘black Bishop’ of the Niger was a young mid-
shipman, afterwards Captain Shergold Smith, R.N.
His son, Lieutenant George Shergold. Smith, served in
the Ashanti expedition. Here he was employed in the
difficult work of securing native porters to accompany
the army. The carrying out of this task afforded him
some experience of, and insight into, the African
character. On a journey taken on this business he
caught a fever, which so injured his eyesight that he
was recommended to retire on a pension. Returning
home, he resolved to devote himself to the ministry of
the Gospel, and entered St. John’s Hall, Highbury, as
a student. Finding his eyesight improve, his thoughts
turned again to the country where he had seen the
‘gross darkness’ covering the people. ‘I love the
African,’ he said, ‘ and I want to preach Christ to him.’
He had already been in communication with the Church
Missionary Society when the call came for labourers
for the Victoria Nyanza Mission. He at once volun-
teered for the work. ‘Send me out,’ he said, ‘in any
capacity. I am Willing to take the lowest place.’ But
the committee, perceiving the worth of his character
and his experience, at once appointed him leader of the
expedition.

In the meantime the call had reached another whose

20 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

heart ‘burned for the deliverance of Africa.’ This was
Alexander Maekay, .a young Scotchman engaged in
engineering work at Berlin. His whole bringing up
had been a preparation for work among the heathen
abroad. The son of a Free Church minister, well
educated, trained in various branches of practical know-
ledge, five years a teacher in Dr. Guthrie’s Ragged
School in Edinburgh, he had gone to Germany, not
merely to work and to distinguish himself as an engineer,
but to use every opportunity of diffusing Scriptural
truth and of winning souls for Christ. Like Lieutenant
Smith, he had already sought an opening for missionary
work in Africa, and his offer of service for the Victoria
Nyanza followed close upon that of the latter. Once
accepted, he used the time that remained to him before
starting on the expedition, to fit himself in every possible
way still further for whatever might devolve on him
to do.

These two men, together with Mr. G. J. Clark, a
railway contractor’s engineer, were accepted by the
committee in January 1876. To them were added Mr.
Mr. T. O’Neill, an architect, and the Rev. C. T. Wilson,
of St. Mary’s llall, Oxford, curate of Collyhurst,
Manchester, who had spent some time in Australia.
They were accepted, the one in February, the other
in March of the same year. Mr. W. M. Robertson, a
skilled artisan, was also accepted in February. The
committee were anxious to secure a medical man for
the expedition, but had not yet found one, when Mr.
Mackay met with a young doctor, then labouring among
the poor in Edinburgh, who had been a fellow—teacher
with him in the Sunday School, and whose thoughts
had been turned towards Mission work in Africa. Dr.
John Smith was accepted only half an hour before the
instructions of the committee were delivered to five of

A CALL FROZIII AFAR. 21

the party (Lieutenant Smith and the two artisans having
already started) before leaving for the field of action.
Among the five was Mr. James Robertson, a builder
of Newcastle, accepted also at the last moment, who,
though unable to obtain the sanction of the Society’s
medical board, had determined to go out at his own
cost and his own risk.

It was at this quiet, yet solemn dismissal, in the old
committee room of the Church Missionary House in
Salisbury Square, that Mr. Mackay uttered the simple
yet memorable words well remembered, and recorded
after his own call up higher. ‘ He was the youngest
of the band’ (we quote from the Church Missionary
Intelligencer for May 1890), ‘and was called upon last
(to reply to the instructions delivered by the Rev.
Henry Wright, the Honorary Secretary). “ There is one
thing,” were his words in substance, “ which my brethren
have not said, and which I want to say. I want to
remind the committee that within six months they will
probably hear that one of us is dead.” The words were
startling, and there was a silence that might be felt.
Then he went on, “Yes ; is it at all likely that eight
Englishmen should start for Central Africa, and all be
alive six months after ? One of us, at least—it may be
I——will surely fall before that. But,” he added, “ what
Iwant to say is this: when that news comes, do not
be cast down, but send some one else immediately to
take the vacant place.”'

The whole story of the Victoria Nyanza Mission
seems mapped out beforehand in these simple words.
It is a story of danger and death, of trial and reverse,
of ever—recurring need; but at the same time a story
of unflinching courage and enduring devotion, of many
a change in the order and aspect of the battle, but of
one purpose put forth, clung to, and carried out, under

22 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

the leadership of One of whom it is written, that ‘He
shall not fail nor be discouraged.’ 1 In no Mission has
more heroism been demanded of, and displayed by, the
soldiers of the Cross; but at the same time in no
Mission has it been more manifest that the work was
of God, and not of man. Many have been the places
left vacant in the field since the work began, and they
have not always been filled up at once. Of the eight
who started on the Mission only three ever reached
Uganda, _and of these three but one is living now;
while one only, the man who uttered that note of
warning beforehand, was able to remain year after year
at his post, and to gather fruit of the seed sown amid
loss and tears. Long did Alexander Mackay ‘ hold the
fort’ on the shores of the Victoria Nyanza almost
alone. True to his parting exhortation, he refused to
be ‘cast down,’ even when prospects seemed blackest,
and human help farthest off. And when at length he
was called to his rest above, and the mainstay of the
Mission seemed removed, then at length the shores of
the lake were trodden by fresh footsteps, and the
brightness of a new day dawned upon Uganda.

From forest depths and river strands
\Vhere scarce a stranger’s foot hath trod,
Lo! Afric stretcheth out her hands,
And seeketh after God.

We sought the fountains of the Nile;
Size seeks the everlasting spring,

The streams that make the desert smile.
And health and gladness bring.

She seeks, unknowing what may he
The end and object of her quest,

She asks, yet all unconsciously,
For life, and peace, and rest.

1 Isa. xlii. 4.

A CALL FROM AFAR. 23

Speed forth the word! Too long hath night
Lain heavy on those regions fair;

Draw back the curtain, that the light
Of heaven may enter there!

How beautiful on hill or vale,
By river side or stately grove,
Shall be their feet who tell the tale
Of Jesus and His love !

God of all goodness, give the word,
Then swiftly shall Thy heralds move,
And Afric’s sons shall own Thee Lord,
Obey, and praise Thy love!
S. G. S.

CHAPTER II.

A LAND OF DARKNESS.

‘ Full of the habitations of cruelty} ~1’SAIM lxxiv. 20.

HE country which the providence of God had in

such a wonderful manner brought before the eyes
of the civilised world, and from which the call had so
distinctly sounded for preachers of the Gospel to ‘ come
over and help,’ is one of the most remarkable in the
vast continent of Africa. Lying just under the Equator,
on the shores of a great inland sea, it has a particularly
healthy climate, the temperature rising but little above
80° Fahr., and seldom sinking below 60" at night. The
land is a succession of hills and hollows, the scenery
being.often not unlike that of an English park, and at
times singularly beautiful. The hollows often contain
swamps, but the hills are covered—or, rather, were so,
before the desolating revolutionary wars—~with rich
groves of plantain and bananas. The soil is exceed—
ingly fertile, and well adapted for cultivation, and there
is good pasture land. Travellers who have‘passed
through arid deserts, and made the often perilous
voyage across the lake, are apt, when they reach
Uganda, to look upon it as a sort of paradise.

A higher degree of civilisation is found here than
in most of the surrounding tribes. The Waganda, or
Baganda, as they call themselves, are a very intelligent

2.;

 

 

 

A LAND OF DARKNESS. 27

race, possessed of many fine qualities. They have con-
siderable manual skill, working well in metals—brass,
iron, and copper—and dressing skins beautifully, and
they are also great adepts at basket-making. The field
work is left to the women. Their clothing is par-
ticularly neat. They wear long robes, fastened on the
right shoulder, made for the most part of mbugu, the
inner bark of a fig-tree, beaten out and carefully sewn
together. But cotton—cloth and coloured calicoes are
also used when they can be obtained. They wear
ornaments finely worked in beads, such as necklets and
girdles, and ivory bracelets are also found among them.
Some of the great chiefs wear robes of scarlet cloth
richly embroidered in gold and silver. The snowy
whiteness of some of the robes has been a matter 01
surprise to strangers. The white robe is called leansu.
A dirty—looking soap is manufactured out of the peelings
of plantains, which is said to answer its purpose well.

The huts of the people are made of straw or grass,
resting on long poles, and are of a conical shape, like
a beehive. The houses and gardens of the great are
surrounded by fences made of the tall tiger-grass. The
houses are built on the slopes of hills, with the door
facing the ascent, and there is a clay ridge in front, to
prevent a flood of water from rushing down into the
house in rainy weather. The sleeping-place is curtained
off with bark-cloth, and bedsteads are used, consisting
of a framework of branches, which rests on stakes
driven into the ground, and which is covered with fine
grass and a mat. A large piece of bark-cloth forms
the coverlet. A square is marked off by four logs in
the middle of the house for a fireplace, and the cooking-
pot rests on three stones.

The ordinary food consists of bananas or plantains
but beef and goats’ flesh are used also, as well as fish

28 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

The people have, as a rule, two meals in the day.
Before eating they wash their hands by having water
poured over them, or by using a sort of sponge made
from the stern of the banana tree. The meals are taken
mostly in the porch, around a space covered with green
plantain leaves. The national drink is a cider made
from bananas, called iizwmge.

The mass of the people belong, in common with the
other tribes of the lake districts, to the great Bantu
family, differing widely from the negroes in habits and
language. But the ruling caste appear to have come
from the north, and are called IVa/mma, or, rather,
Ba/mma. King Mtesa boasted that he was a descendant
of Ham (whose name he may have heard mentioned by
the Arabs), and assured Lieutenant Smith that this
remote ancestor lay buried in Uganda. Curiously
enough, the herdsmen of Uganda, who are also Bahuma,
are the most despised of the population. The Baganda
are divided into @1177, or clans, each of which is dis-
tinguished by the name of an animal, and no person
may eat the animal after which his clan is named.

Their government was, in theory, before the advent
of the British East Africa Company, an absolute
monarchy. By the old law of the country the king
could not be succeeded by his eldest son. One of the
other sons was chosen by an assembly of the great
chiefs. On his election to the dignity of lmba/ea, or
emperor, he had to seat himself on an ancient stone
throne; this was called ‘eating’ (taking possession of)
‘ Buganda.’ The unsuccessful candidates were in former
times slaughtered. The [balm/ca was the sole authority
in the country. He appointed his own chiefs and council,
declared war, and disposed at his pleasure of the labours
of his subjects and the profits of their industry. The
degree of despotism which he exercised depended, of

A LAND OF DARKNESS. 29

course, somewhat on his personal qualities; and the
great chiefs, although nominally subject to his will, did,
in fact, exercise a varying influence upon him.

Strange to stay, it has been the custom for two
women to bear the title of leaba/ca, as well as the king.
These were the queen-mother (namas/e), and the
queen-sister (lubuga). The latter was chosen from
among the princesses. The former was the king’s own
mother, or, if she were no longer living, his aunt or
some other female relative. The older female relatives
of King Mtesa appear to have exercised no little degree
of influence over him.

The chief minister is called the kalzkz'ro. The man
who held this office for many years under both Mtesa
and Mwanga contrived to obtain a considerable amount
of power; in fact, this was shown by his retaining office
at the death of the former monarch, contrary to the
usual custom. The chiefs next in rank are either lords
of the five provinces of Buganda, or fill various posts
of trust about the king. The rule used to be that the
lords of the provinces spent a part of every year at the
capital, to wait on the king, while the remainder was
passed in their different spheres of government, where
they ruled as petty kings, having the right to exact
tribute for themselves, besides what the king’s tax-
gatherers collected for him. Besides these great lords
there are many sub-chiefs of lesser rank, some belonging
to the ‘upper class’ in Uganda, the (Jam/ca, or here-
ditary landowners.

The lower class, or peasants, are called baleopz'.
They are generally attached to some master, and have
the right to serve whom they please, but have been
known to suffer punishment occasionally for the crime
of deserting one master for another. The three Baganda
who came to England in 1879, as envoys to the Queen

30 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

from King Mtesa, belonged t0'this class, though they
were passed off on the white men as chiefs.

The military force in Uganda was, in former years,
not inconsiderable, though probably far below the
numbers at which (forgetting that the population of the
country could not be judged by that of the capital)
some have estimated it. The soldiers, armed with
long spears and wooden shields, followed their chiefs
to battle, as in feudal times the serfs followed their
feudal lord. The king also possessed a fleet of canoes,
commanded by an admiral (gabunga).

The strong, settled government of Uganda, the
intelligence of the people, and the degree of civilisation
attained by them, together with the beauty and fertility
of the country, made a very favourable impression on
those who visited it. But, just as in the hollows
between the smiling hills there lay hidden many a
swamp infested by venomous reptiles, so below all the
superficial show of excellence there existed a depth
of evil and of wretchedness hardly to be surpassed
anywhere.

Their very strength and power made the Baganda
idle, and instead of applying themselves to developing
the resources of their country, they preferred to augment
their possessions from time to time by raids upon the
weaker tribes surrounding them, burning the villages,
slaughtering the people, appropriating the herds of cattle,
and carrying off large numbers of women and children
into slavery. Every class in Uganda was possessed of
slaves, even the balm/)2. or peasants, while a ready sale
was always found for them among the Arab traders.
It is needless to enter here into the horrors of African
slavery, and of the transport of these unfortunate
human chattels from the interior to the coast. It is an
old but terrible story. And though in Uganda a slave

A LAND OF DARKNESS. 31

might chance to be well treated and to improve his
position, the contrary was often the case. Mr. Ashe
relates that on one occasion when a tribe, called the
Bakedi, were defeated by the Baganda, the women all
chose to die sooner than live as slaves.

But it was not slaves alone who suffered in Uganda.
In spite of certain forms of justice, which were scrupu-
lously observed, there was little safety either for a
man’s property or for his life. The weak were the
continual prey of the strong. A single passenger along
the high road might at any moment be attacked and
robbed of all he had with him, and for a poor man
there was no redress. But far worse were the cruelties
committed by royal order. Suna, the predecessor and
father of Mtesa, not unfrequently ordered a kz‘wendo, or
wholesale slaughter of human beings ; and Mtesa now
and then followed his father’s example. At the rebuild-
ing of Suna’s tomb, executioners were set to watch all
the roads that led to the capital, and capture all who
passed that way. Peasants coming to the capital with
the produce of their land, unaware of what was going
on, fell into the trap set for them. When two thousand
captives had been secured, the whole number were
mercilessly butchered, as an offering to the spirit of the
late king. During Mtesa’s illness a similar massacre
was ordered, in hopes that it would assist his recovery !
And these unhappy wretches were not merely killed.
but tortured to death after the most horrible fashion.
The punishments, too, not only for real offences, but
for anything the king chose to reckon as a crime, were
so savage, that the code of Uganda might be said to
emulate that of Draco of old, and to be written in
blood. On one occasion, for instance, Mtesa issued an
order that every man should wear a bead on his wrist,
on pain of losing his head, and every woman a bead on

32 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

her waist, on pain of being cut in half! There being
no prisons where criminals could be secured with
safety, the minor punishments consisted generally of
mutilation, such as cutting off hands, feet, ears, or nose.
In cases when the criminal was permitted to ransom
himself, he was put in the stocks till the ransom was
paid.

And yet many a murder was suffered to take place
without any punishment. The case is related of a
boy, the son of a chief, who told the king that he
was impatient to be a chief himself. ‘Well,’ was the
answer. ‘you have only to go and kill your father.’
The lad acted on the hint, and actually went about
bragging of what he had done. One of Mtesa’s own
sons was shot by his brother, and the only notice
taken of the matter was that the missionaries were
summoned to attend the wounded man, and that he
was removed some miles off, that he might not die near
the palace !

In a few words Mr. Ashe has summed up what
were common occurrences during his residence in
Uganda :—

‘ Daily went up the terrible cries of unhappy victims,
as they were deliberately hacked to pieces, with strips
of reed sharp enough to be used as knives, condemned
very often for nothing, or merely for some breach of
court etiquette. Frequently furnaces were smoking,
in which the agonised bodies of persons innocent of
any crime were writhing in slow torture, till death,
more merciful than their tormentors, ended their
anguish and despair. Sometimes scenes of hideous
shame were enacted which make the heart sick to
contemplate.’

No wonder he exclaims :—

‘What a fearful picture was presented in reality

A LAND OF DARKNESS. 33

in that gay and bright-looking palace of pleasure built
upon its sunny hill !’

The religion of this beautiful, but dark and unhappy
country consisted of a kind of worship of spirits called
lubare. The Baganda believed in a supreme Creator,
whom they called Katonga, but said that he had handed
over his authority to the lubares, of whom there
appeared to be many. Some of them represented
various phenomena of Nature, such as the rainbow,
the earthquake, the thunder; and the two virulent
diseases of Uganda (brought on probably by insanitary
conditions), Icamnpu/z' (the black plague) and the small—
pox, are spoken of as evil spirits. Pre—eminent among
the lulmrcs was that of the Nyanza, who was supposed
to have supreme control over its waters, and Whom
the seamen and fishermen were wont to propitiate by
offerings of fruit thrown into the lake. Great respect
was paid to Mukasa, the person in whom the lubare of
the lake was supposed to reside, and he had the power
to prevent any one from landing on the coast until he
gave permission. The spirits of the departed (if of
any importance) were also called lubare, and were
believed to reside in certain persons, to whom was
given the name of mandwa. When a mandwa died,
another speedily rose up to take his place. These
men dressed themselves in white or black goat—skin,
and carried a club of crooked wood adorned with iron
knobs and bells. They affected strange ways and
speech, in order to inspire terror.

Uganda possessed no idols, and apparently nothing
that could be called worship, but numerous little
temples, or rather huts, studded the roadsides, sacred
to some lubare, generally with a tree growing close by,
on which were hung charms, to propitiate the spirit.
Charms made of grass, bark—cloth, and various other

3

34 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

things were also hung on the doors, and laid on the
threshold of the houses, besides being worn on the
person. Besides the mandwa, or priests of lubares,
there were diviners, whose business it was to detect
criminals, and another class of diviners, somewhat
answering to the augurs among the ancient Romans.

The religion of Islam, introduced by the Arabs, had,
when the missionaries reached Uganda, taken no hold
on the mass of the people, although it had had an
undoubted effect in loosening the hold upon them of
their own ancestral beliefs. Its adoption for a time by
King Mtesa, which was, as a matter of course, followed
by his chiefs, was merely nominal. Yet it proved in
after years a formidable opponent to the work of the
Gospel.

Such was the country, and such the nation, to whom,
in answer to the half-unconscious petition for help, the
Gospel was about to be sent. It might have been ‘truly
described in the words: ‘ where Satan's seat is ' ; 1 for
there indeed the ‘ strong man armed ’ 2 kept his palace,
and nothing seemed to disturb his reign. Strangely
significant was the name given to it by the Arabs, on
account of its distance from the coast, and the perils to
be passed through in reaching it—the ‘Land of the
Grave.’ But the hourhad arrived when the inhabitants
of this ‘grave’ were to ‘hear the voice of the Son of
God,’8 and life was to come into the place of death,
life new, irresistible, immortal.

‘ For God is love, and He livclh,
And life is His livingr breath,

And one breath of life is stronger
Than all the hosts of death.’

Aut/wr (y~ [/15 Sr/u'iu/wy-Cu/m Family.

' Rev. ii. [3. '-’ Luke xi. 21. 3 john V. 2;.

CHAPTER III.

FROM THE SHORES OF ENGLAND TO NYANZA.
‘ He led them forth by the right way.’—PSALM cvii. 7.

HE shortest route to the Victoria Nyanza, reckoned

by distance, is through Egypt and the Egyptian
Soudan, up the Nile, which issues from the lake at
the Ripon Falls, the western boundary of Uganda.
It might have been supposed that the Mission party
would have been sent by this route. But there were
strong reasons against it. It would have involved a
journey through the midst of many hostile tribes, and
would have connected the missionaries, in the minds
of the natives, with the advance of the Egyptian power.
The whole series of events which led to the sending
forth of the Mission pointed to the route by the east
coast as the one to be chosen. Dr. Krapf, who from
his retreat in Wurtemberg watched with the keenest
interest the progress of the matter, urged the desirability
of making the start north-westward from Mombasa,
following the line of his own former journeys to
Ukambani, and continuing so as to reach the north—
western shore of the lake. This was, however, for
the most part an unknown route, and it seemed wiser
to follow in the track of Burton, Speke, Grant, Stanley,
and Cameron, starting from the mainland opposite
Zanzibar, and journeying westward in the direction of

35

36 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

Unyanyembe, and thence to the lake. Much valuable
advice was given by Colonel Grant; and Lieutenant
Cameron, on his return from Africa, also took an
interest in the plans of the Society, and offered some
important suggestions.

The first start was made on March II, 1876, when
Lieutenant Smith sailed out of Teignmouth harbour
in the Highland Lassie, an 80—ton sailing yacht, pre-
sented by friends to the East African Mission for ser-
vice on the coast. Before starting Lieutenant Smith
spoke to the crew of Him to whose service both the
vessel and its present commander were devoted, and
all knelt down together and commended themselves to
the care of their great Captain. The Highland Lassie
encountered much rough weather on the voyage, but
reached her destination without harm on June 20.
Lieutenant Smith, however, left her at Aden, under
charge of the mate, and, continuing his voyage by
steamer, arrived a month earlier.

He immediately proceeded, together with Mr. Mackay,
who had travelled by the same steamer, to explore the
rivers Wami and Kingani, which, rising in the highlands
of Usagara, fall into the sea at no great distance from
one another, opposite the island of Zanzibar. It was
at first thought that Usagara might be most easily
reached by water, but the fallacy of the idea soon
became evident. The course of both rivers was so
tortuous that the progress of the little steam-launch
Daisy, which had been brought out from England, was
extremely slow. After difficult navigation up stream
for twenty miles the voyagers would find themselves
but a couple of hours’ distance by land from the point
whence they started. Stumps of trees in the channel
were, moreover, a frequent source of danger. The
rivers wound through banks of dense jungle and

'HHO‘JHVH HLHOIVNDIELL DNIAVEI'I HISSV'I GNV’IHDIH EIHJ.

 

 

\

FRO/ll Ell/GLAND T0 NYANZA. 39

stretches of slimy, unwholesome plains, where poison-
ous malaria lurked. Further inland the face of the
country improved, and prosperous-looking villages were
passed, whence the natives poured out to gaze at their
strange visitors ; and one chief assured the missionaries
that he would be delighted if they would come and
stay in his country, and that he would give them the
whole of it!

Meanwhile the work of collecting and packing stores,
and engaging porters, had gone on vigorously at the
coast. By July I the whole Mission party were
assembled there, and nearly ready for the start by
land. They had to take with them on the journey
not merely personal luggage, as well as all kinds of
articles for the industrial work of the Mission, but
also the ‘money' for the way, both for the purchase
of food, and also for the lzongo, or tribute exacted of
travellers by chiefs through whose territory they had
to pass. The ‘money’ current in the regions for
which they were bound consists of cotton—cloth, brass
wire, and beads. The whole of the stores had to be
carried on men’s shoulders, and it took both time and
tact to engage the porters necessary for the under-
taking. These porters, pagaazz', who hire themselves
out to travellers, belong mostly to various tribes of
the interior. Having come down to the coast in the
employ of some merchant or traveller, they are ready
to accompany others inland again as far as their own
country. It was necessary, however, to secure a certair
number of Zanzibar men, as none of the inland pagaazz
would go the whole of the way.

At length, on July 14, the first division of the
party started from Bagamoyo on the coast, followed
at intervals by three others, Lieutenant Smith himself
remaining to the last. But already the shadow of loss

40 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

had fallen upon the brave little band, and Mr. Mackay’s
note of warning was sadly verified. Mr. James Robert-
son (who had gone out at his own risk) was taken ill
shortly after his arrival at the coast, and on August 5,
before the last of the band had started, he had entered
into rest. The new start for the evangelisation of
East Africa, like the first one, was inaugurated by a
death. A small limestone pyramid on French Island
marks the grave of the first member of the Victoria
Nyanza Mission who fell in this enterprise.

The march of two hundred and twenty miles to
Mpwapwa, in Usagara, where the first Mission station
on the way to the lake was to be founded, was not
without its difficulties and trials. It was no easy
matter to exercise proper control over the half-savage,
self—willed pagaazi. There were vexatious delays,
owing to the desire of the chiefs through whose
countries they passed to detain the travellers awhile,
in the hope of making more profit out of them. Then
Mr. Mackay speaks of the difficulties occasioned by the
‘wild-goose method of marching, which we, like all
before us, have adopted.’ The path, whether it lay
through cultivated field, forest, jungle, tall grass,
swamp, or stony ravine, was usually wide enough
only for a single traveller, and no one had ever
attempted to improve it. Often, in fact, a way had
to be cut through the vegetation. Often the march
was made through heavy rain; and the party did not
escape attacks of fever, while a few of the porters were
carried off by small-pox.

The road to Mpwapwa rises gradually from the coast
to a plateau 1,500 feet high, to which succeeds the
great mountain range of East Africa, reaching here to
a height of from 4,000 to 5,000 feet. A descent of
1,000 feet leads to a second plateau, on the edge of

F1803] ENGLAND T0 NYANZA. 41

which stands Mpwapwa itself, finely situated on the
heights, overlooking an extensive plain nearly covered
with forest, and abounding in wild animals. It is a
fine, healthy situation.

The missionaries were well received by the people
of Mpwapwa, and here was commenced the first Mission
station on the way to the lake, Mr. G. J. Clark being
left in charge of it, together with the mate of the High-
land Lassie, who had accompanied the party. The
remaining five proceeded towards the lake, Mr. O’Neill
and the Rev. C. T. Wilson going on first, while Lieu-
tenant Smith followed with Dr. John Smith and Mr.
Mackay.

The second stage of the journey was even more
trying than the first. The route led over the Marenga
Mkhali, a port", or waterless plain extending forty miles.
This crossed, the travellers found themselves in the
treeless plains of Ugogo. Here they had to pay heavy
lzongo to the various petty chiefs, who delayed their
passage as much as possible, in order to get all they
could out of them. The first party passed over a
second and longer port, the Mgunda Mkhali, and both
met at Nguru, in Usukuma, on the borders of Unya-
mwezi. Meanwhile their number had been reduced to
four, for Mr. Mackay, sorely against his will, had been
compelled by the doctor to return to the coast.

At Nguru, the porters, finding themselves in their
OWncountry, considered their engagement at an end,
and quietly laid down their loads and walked off. Being
unable to obtain fresh ones close at hand, Lieutenant
Smith proceeded westward to Unyanyembe to procure
more. The district of Unyanyembe is an important
trading centre, and possessed at that time an Arab
governor under the Sultan of Zanzibar. Its principal
village or town is Kazeh, or Taboro. Here Lieutenant

42 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

Smith was delayed for some weeks, the natives being
utterly regardless of the flight of time. Meanwhile
Mr. O’Neill and Mr. Wilson had gone on with a small
caravan towards the lake, passing through Usukuma,
of which Mr. O’Neill gives a pleasing picture. ‘The
whole distance travelled over,’ he writes, ‘is studded
with villages, nicely situated, and surrounded by green
hedgerows of euphorbia ; altogether the country is a
fine, open one, with much cattle, and well cultivated,
every village having a considerable breadth of land
sown with Indian corn or millet, and everywhere water
is abundant. I should say it would by proper manage-
ment become a very rich country; but the great
drawback is the absence of any king or ruler recognised
over the entire country. Kings there are in abundance,
for every village we passed had one, but there is no
central authority. . . . The people areamild and indus-
trious race.’

On January 29, 1877, the travellers reached Kagei,
on the southern shore of the lake, at the entrance to Speke
Gulf. Lieutenant Smith and Dr. Smith did not arrive
till April I, owing to bad health and various troubles.
The former writes :—

‘Our journey from Nguru to this place was a stormy
one. It seemed to me that all Satan’s force was allied
against us. The men deserted by fifties; lies, thefts,
false reports, all were used to delay us, and it took us
six weeks to accomplish that which can easily be done
in sixteen days. All our marketable cloth was stolen
either by our own pagaazz' or 011 the highway, and stays
of two and sometimes three days at one village during
the rainy season, without sufficient protection for our
goods, caused us much loss. But He that is stronger
was with us, and enabled us to overcome all difficulties,
bringing us to this place on April I. You may

 

1,
ll‘

‘9‘ ., \S
éiywéf’t. $5

(
ft}: 1

\ Ii,

“I
n?

 

 

 

DR. JOHN SMITH’S CRAVE AT KAGEI.

F190.” ENGLAND 70 NYANZA. 45

imagine with what joy and thankfulness I first beheld
the lake, its blue waters gleaming like a bit of sea in
the distance.’

Kagei was the first place on the shores of the lake
visited by Stanley, and there the missionaries found
the grave of one of his men, with the inscription:
‘ F. B. 1875. Stanley's Ex.’ It was not long before
another grave hallowed the place whence the first
messengers of the Gospel of peace looked down upon
the waters that were to bear them to Uganda. Dr.
Smith, who had enjoyed remarkable health for the
greater part of the journey, suffered greatly from fever
on the last march from Nguru, and was carried the
whole of the way. On his arrival at the lake he began
to improve, but an attack of dysentery, which he had
not strength to resist, proved to be the messenger to
summon him to the immediate presence of the Master
whom he served. Calmly and peacefully he passed
away on May 11, leaving a great gap in the
missionary circle. A pile of stones was raised over
his grave, with a block of sandstone for a headstone,
on which an inscription was cut by Mr. O’Neill; and
there that grave stands as a sentinel, watching until
the glory of the Lord shall cover the plains around,
and shine across the waters that stretch out in front of
it, a silent witness for Christ until He come.

The telegram from Aden which conveyed the news
home also brought tidings of progress in the work
for which that young life had been laid down. It
ran thus: ‘Dr. John Smith dead. Daisy «Nyanza.
Mpwapwa road completed.’ The little steam-launch
Daisy, which had been brought out from England in
sections, and put together for the voyage up the rivers
VVami and Kingani, had again been taken to pieces
for the journey up to the lake. The sections, however,

46 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

reached Kagei considerably injured and reduced in
number, looking, Mr. O’Neill writes, ‘a perfect wreck.’
The first work was to rebuild her, when six inches
more gunwale were added, to increase her seaworthi—
ness, and a false keel, to improve her sailing qualities.
The telegram refers to her being finished and launched
on the Victoria Nyanza, for which she was originally
destined. A pier was also run out a short distance
into the lake, constructed with the large stones with
Which the country abounds, for the convenience of
loading and landing goods. It was intended also to
build another boat, but there was no timber suitable
for the purpose. Lieutenant Smith resolved therefore
to visit Ukerewe, Where he heard there was a dhow, or
Arab boat, which he might be able to purchase.

Ukerewe is a large island on the lake, which was
called after it ‘ Sea of Ukerewe’ (as before mentioned).
It is twenty-five miles from Kagei. It had been visited
before Lieutenant Smith’s arrival by Mr. Wilson, the
king, Lukongeh, having sent the missionaries a present
of sheep and goats, with an invitation to go and see
him. During the stormy voyage thither the canoe
men kept singing, and one of their songs ran thus:
‘ Many men are dead; for them we are sorry, for they
never saw the white man. We have seen the white
man, and are glad.’ Lieutenant Smith, in relating the
circumstances of his visit, gives the following conver-
sation with canoe men, as an instance of an African’s
idea of time :—

‘When will you take me to Ukerewe ? ’

‘Whenever you like.’

‘ Then in two hours be ready.’

‘No go to—day; to-day must go and sell bananas;
go to—morrow.’

Smith was well received by the king, and concluded

FROM ENGLAND T0 NYANZA. 47

the purchase of the dhow with the Arab Songoro, to
whom she belonged, little thinking that this man would
be the cause of his death and that of his companion,
Mr. O’Neill! He wrote from Ukerewe :—

‘ Now as we are about taking possession in the name
of Christ of our respective kingdoms’ (it being intended
that one party should proceed to Karagwé, the other to
Uganda), ‘pray for us. How much we need your
prayers we ourselves faintly know. Yet this we
know: He heareth you.’

In the meantime, Mr. Mackay, who had had to'be
carried in a hammock the greater part of the way back
to Mpwapwa had arrived at the coast with restored
health. He was now busy constructing a rough road
for bullock waggons from Saadani, a few miles above
the mouth of the Wami, to Mpwapwa—no light task to
accomplish with only native labourers, utterly ignorant
of such work. He engaged forty men (besides donkey
men and other supernumeraries), and equipped them
with American hatchets, English axes, Snider sword
bayonets, picks, spades, and saws. He provided
himself besides with carpenters’ tools, hammers, one
donkey—load of nails and another of cocoa-nut rope,
and last, but not least, a small grindstone. ‘ This,’ he
writes, ‘ I. have mounted on a wooden frame, and every
evening we return from work in time the edges of the
tools are applied to the face of this wonderful machine,
while the villagers crowd round, as anxiously gazing
on as little Toddie ever did when he “wanted to see
the wheels go wound.”’ For a good part of the first
fifty miles there was dense jungle to cut through, and
here the branches of the trees were so thickly inter—
twined with the creepers, that to hew a tree by the
roots seldom meant bringing it down. Here the
Sniders did good work. Then there were Mullahs or

48 YHE STORY OF UGANDA.

deep watercourses to be passed. Over one Mr.
Mackay built a bridge of timber as hard as iron, a
great marvel in the eyes of the natives. But this
occupied seven days, and as there was not enough time
to be expended over the others, a sloping way was
made down the bank of the Mullah, and in some cases
it was avoided by a long a’c’z‘our. Mr. Mackay thus
describes what the natives thought of it :—

‘Passers-by open their mouth as well as their eyes
at the fifth kubwa (big road) of the white man; and
" when they return to talk together at evening in their
lembes (native dwellings), the story of the “big road ”
is told; and, as is always the case in Africa, with
enormous exaggeration. With the chief men, how-
ever, the story does not always go well down ; and the
report is being Widely spread that the English are
coming to take possession of the country, an alarm
which I hope will die a speedy and natural death.
The chief of the village near which I made the bridge
took a more practical view of the matter, and told me
one day, with all the command his dirty visage could
assume, that I must pay him a hundred dollars for
cutting down the trees in his territory. I told him that
it was he who should give me the hundred dollars, to
pay my men for making a bridge which he and his
people could not make, but which, as soon as I was
gone, he would call his own, and probably levy bongo
from those caravans which cared to pay him.’

The road was finished in one hundred days, and
during that time Mr. Mackay calculated that what with
going to and fro, inspecting and ordering, he walked
the whole distance, two hundred and fifty miles at least,
half-a—dozen times over, besides occasional help from a
donkey. But the ground won was not kept possession
of by after—comers, and in course of time thick vegeta=

FRO!!! ENGLAND 2‘0 NYANZA. 49

tion again covered what had been cleared with so much
pains.

In some twelve years not merely the territory
between Mpwapwa and the coast, but the whole of the
ground traversed by the missionary band, has passed
into the possession not of the English, but of the
Germans, a possession, it is true, at present in great
part merely nominal and theoretical, but destined pro-
bably to become thoroughly real and efiective in the
future.

‘Soldier, go—but not to claim
JVIoulderingr spoils of earth~born treasure;
Not to build a vaunting name;
Not to dwell in tents of pleasure;
Dream not that the way is smooth.
Hope not that the thorns are roses ;
Turn no wishful eye of youth
\Vhere the sunny beam reposes;
Thou hast sterner work to do,
Hosts to cut thy passage through;
Close behind thee gulfs are burning—
Forward l—there is no returning.’
Anon.

CHAPTER IV.

THE GOAL REACHED.
‘ Neither count I my life dear unto myself.’—ACTS xx. 24.

HE original plan of the Mission included the

kingdom of Karagwé, situated on the western
shore of the Victoria Nyanza. Karagwe’ had been
visited both by Speke and by Stanley, and although
tributary to Uganda, appeared to be a kingdom of some
importance, while the mild and friendly character of
the king, Rumanika, as described by these travellers,
augured well for the establishment of a Mission there.
Lieutenant Smith had arranged to proceed thither with
Mr. Wilson, and then, leaving the latter in Karagwe,
to go on himself to Uganda. But two pressing mes-
sages from King Mtesa induced him to change his
plan. While on the island of Ukerewe a messenger
reached him bearing the following letter, written for
the king by a boy brought up in Bishop Steere’s
Mission School in Zanzibar, Whom Stanley had left
with the king, that he might teach him :—

‘To MY DEAR FRIEND,—

‘ I have heard that you have reached Ukerewe,
so now I want you to come to me quickly. I give you
Magombwa to be your guide, and now you must come
to me quickly—This letter from me, Mtesa, King of

50

THE GOAL REACHEI). 51

Uganda, written by Dallington Scopion Mufta, April
10, 1877.’
Mufta himself had added these lines :—

‘To MY DEAR SIR,—

‘ I have heard that you are in Ukerewe, and
this king is very fond of you. He wants Englishmen
more than all.—This is from your servant, Dallington
Scopion.’

The messenger who brought this letter was quickly
followed by another, bringing the following :—

‘ MY SECOND LETTER TO MY DEAR FRIEND WITE MEN. I
send this my servant that you may come quickly, and
let not this my servant come without you. And send
my salaam to Lukongeh, King of Ukerewe, and Maduma
Mwanangwa of Kageye, and Songoro.—This from me,
Mtesa, King of Uganda.’

On receiving these letters Lieutenant Smith felt that
the Visit to Uganda must not be deferred. Accordingly,
on June 25, he and Mr. Wilson started in the Daisy,
leaving Mr. O'Neill at Ukerewe to complete the building
of the dhow. Being favoured with a fresh breeze they
reached Murchison Bay next evening, and the following
day landed, en male for Mtesa’s capital. But this
voyage, perhaps the most favourable, as far as wind
and weather were concerned, that any missionary has
made across the lake, had its own record of danger and
injury. Desiring to land the first day in order to cook
their midday meal, the voyagers coasted along the shore
of Ukara, a small island north of Ukerewe, and made
for a ‘snug little bay ’ which they thought would suit
their purpose. They observed, as they drew nearer, a
crowd of natives on the shore, who greeted them with
a musical cry, which they mistook for a note of friendly
welcome. But for the sudden appearance of a rock

52 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

ahead they would have run right into the hands of their
enemies, but Lieutenant Smith, seeing it, immediately
put the boat about. This in all probability saved their
lives, for the natives immediately poured upon them
a shower of spears, arrows, and stones. Lieutenant
Smith was struck in the left eye by a stone, Mr. Wilson
received a poisoned arrow in his arm, and two of the
men were slightly wounded. The boat was immediately
put back, and they were soon out of the reach of
further injury. Smith, in great pain and blinded,
nevertheless sucked the wound in Mr. Wilson’s arm,
and much of the poison having passed off in his clothes,
he sustained no serious harm; but Smith’s eye (the
good one, for the right was of little use to him) was
irreparably injured. In a private letter giving an
account of the event he writes :—

‘It was a merciful preservation, and I shall ever
thank God for putting that rock in our way. . . . Don’t
blame the natives; they gave us warning not to approach
by their war-cry, which I mistook for a note of welcome.
Doubtless they thought we were come to attack them.
. . . I often wondered, looking at it from a sailor’s point
of view, why Christ was so often called the “ Rock,”
seeing how fatal to mariners rocks generally are. It is
different now.’

From Ukara they struck right across the lake, and
next morning sighted land, which proved to be some
islands off the coast of Uganda. Proceeding up Mur-
chison Bay, with lovely views on either hand, shortly
after sunset they anchored off the coast. The following
day messengers arrived from Mtesa to bring them up to
the capital Rubaga. They arrived there on Saturday,
June 30, and rested the Sunday in the huts set apart
for them by the king. Their reception next day is
best told in the missionaries’ own words.

71/3124 22/; uo [51ng 21/; pun 7/3] 2y; uo 020210 27/; flung; 22/; u; 5; 1611220 21/1

'ngI ‘vznv‘w vmomm mu NO 1311.; 'S'N'D 3m.

 

 

THE GOAL REA CHED. 55

Mr. Wilson writes :—

‘About 8 o’clock a.m. two of the chief officers came
to fetch us. They were neatly dressed in Turkish
costume, long white tunics, trousers, and stockings,
with red shoes and caps. A few soldiers, neatly dressed
in white tunics and trousers, and armed with flint-
looking guns, formed our escort, as we climbed the hill
on the top of which stands Mtesa’s palace. This is a
long and lofty building of tiger-grass stems, and is
thatched with grass and is extremely neat. In front
of the palace are a number of courts, separated from
one another by high fences of tiger-grass, and sliding
doors between them of the same material. These doors
were opened as we approached, and closed behind us.
In each court two lines of soldiers, dressed in white,
were drawn up, between which we passed.

‘Arrived at the palace itself, we entered the central
hall, hat in hand, and found all the chief men of the
country sitting along each side on wooden stools. All
were dressed in Turkish costume, some in black tunics,
others in red, and others again in white ones. All rose
as we entered, and we were conducted to the upper end
of the hall, where the king sat on a chair of white
wood, with a carpet before him, the rest of the hall
being strewn with dry grass. He was dressed in a
black Turkish tunic, white trousers bound with red,
white stockings, and he wore red shoes, and had a red
cap on his head ; he also wore a richly mounted sword.
He came down from his throne and shook hands with
us, and motioned us to two seats which had been placed
for us. We then sat for some time looking at one
another till he called one of the messengers he had sent
to Ukerewe for us, and bade him narrate our adven—
tures, which the man did in an eloquent speech. Then
the letter from the Sultan of Zanzibar was read, and

56 Till? STORY OF UGANDA.

next the Society’s letters were presented, and the
English one translated into Swahili for the king by
Mufta, the boy Whom Stanley left to instruct the king.’

Lieutenant Smith continues : ‘At the first pause the
king ordered a few de joz'e to be fired, and a general
rejoicing for the letter; but at the end, where it was
said that it was the religion of Jesus Christ which was
the foundation of England’s greatness and happiness,
and would be of his kingdom also, he half rose from
his seat, called his head musician, Tole, to him, and
ordered a more vigorous rejoicing to be made, and
desired the interpreter to tell us that this which we
heard and saw (for all the assembly were bowing their
heads and gently and noiselessly clapping their hands,
and saying Nycmzzg five or six times) was for the
name of Jesus.’

The missionaries, however, quickly found out that
they had to do with a character changeable as the
Wind. Lieutenant Smith goes on :—

‘The following day we went twice. In the morning
it was a full court, as before, and from some cause he
seemed suspicious of us, and questioned us about
Gordon, and rather wanted to bully us into making
powder and shot, saying, “ Now my heart is not good."
We said we came to do as the letter told him, not to
make powder and shot; and if he wished it we would
not stay. He paused for some time, and then said,
“ What have you come for— to teach my people to read
and write ? " We said, “Yes, and whatever useful arts
we and those coming may know.” Then calling the
interpreter, he said, “ Tell them now my heart is good ;
England is my friend.”’

In the evening Mtesa sent for the missionaries again.
He told them he had wanted to say something in the
morning, but was afraid of the Arabs. He wanted to

THE GOAL REACH/fl). 57

know if they had brought ‘ The Book,’ and was pleased
when they assured him they had, and that they hoped
soon to give it him in his own language. Little did
he guess what that ‘ Book ’ was to accomplish—how it
was not only to prove the source of new life to numbers
of his subjects, but after his death was to revolutionise
his kingdom.

Without delay a piece of ground was assigned to the
missionaries, and labourers sent to build them a house.
The land, about two acres in extent, was on the slope
of a hill opposite the one on which the king’s palace
stood, with a stream of water flowing below. The
house was built of the stems of tiger—grass, with a high
roof, thatched with grass, and supported by a number
of poles, the partitions and doors of the rooms being
made also of tiger-grass. A kind of service was com-
menced at the palace every Sunday, for which day
Mtesa professed a certain respect. The king also
began to learn the English alphabet, and expressed his
desire that his people should learn to read and write.
He also showed a remarkable readiness to receive
religious instruction. One day he asked why so many
white men were unbelievers in Christ. When told
that faith was the gift of God, and that no man could
call Jesus the Son of God except through the Holy
Spirit, he turned to his people and said, pointing
upward: ‘ All comes from above; all comes from God.’

Lieutenant Smith remained for a month, and then
leaving Mr. Wilson to occupy the neat little hut built
for them by the king’s order, went back to Ukerewe
in the Daisy. Here he found Mr. O’Neill still busy
with the completion of the dhow. Thence he proceeded
to Kagei, and then, sailing up Speke Gulf, he explored
the rivers Shimeyu and Ruwana. Returning, he
next surveyed Jordan’s Nullah, to the west of Kagei,

58 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

Writing to the Committee of the Church Missionary
Society the report of all he had seen, dated November
2, he concludes with the words :‘—

‘ Please give me full instructions as to the Society's
Wishes concerning expenditure, etc. My former instruc-
tions are fulfilled, and Ijoyfully praise God that by His
might and by His strength they have been enabled to
be carried out with, I trust, the full approval of the
committee. Lord Shaftesbury’s parting word, Zech.
iv. 6—how true !’

Little did he think that the work appointed for him
by his great Captain was almost fulfilled, and his
time of rest close at hand. Returning to Ukerewe, he
found the dhow (which had been named Chimosi,
as embodying in its consonants the initials of the
Society, C.M.S.) ready to be launched. But to his
surprise the king, Lukongeh, appeared with an armed
force, and seizing mast, yard, rudder, and anchor, for-
bade the removal of the dhow, as it was his property.
It then transpired that the Arab Songoro had played
the king false, having informed the latter that the white
men were finishing the dhow for him, instead of saying
that they had bought it from him. Moreover, he had
never paid the king for the timber, and had also kept
for himself a present sent through him to Lukongeh by
the missionaries. The matter was at length adjusted
by Songoro’s rendering to the king a heavy indemnity.
They parted in a friendly manner, the king paying a
special visit to Mr. O’Neill, to request him to remain
on the island, as all the people loved him, because
he said Wale/m sugu (good-morning) to them. Mr.
O’Neill had so endeared himself to the islanders that
he was known among them by the name of lVaz‘c/za
Once/€32 (the good O’Neill).

On November 25 the Daisy and the Chimosi,

THE GOAL REACHED. 59

containing the Mission party, arrived ofl‘ Kagei, whence
they had to fetch the stores left there. But here the
dhow, owing to the ground swell, drifted on to the
rocks, and was wrecked. Everything of consequence,
however, was rescued, save Lieutenant Smith’s Bible.
‘The lake,’ he remarks, ‘has never had so noble a
gift before.’ On December 4 they started for Uganda
in the Daisy. Contrary winds, however, obliged them
to put back to Ukerewe; and here they became once
more involved in the quarrel between Songoro and
the king. As far as could be gathered from the con-
flicting reports of the natives, Songoro begged the
loan of the Daisy, in order to transport a part of his
household to the mainland. Attacked shortly after-
wards by the king, he fled to the missionaries for
protection, and they chivalrously refused to give him
up. They were then assailed in their turn, and the
whole party slain, except one man, who was made
prisoner, and two of Songoro’s men, who fled.

Thus fell the two leaders of the expedition (for
O’Neill was second in command to Smith)—fell on the
very threshold of their enterprise, and yet not before
the instructions given them at starting had been carried
out, the work of preparation effected, and one missionary,
at least, placed at the court of Uganda. Their last
words unrecorded on earth, their last moments un-
witnessed by any friend who could tell of them, their
noble, brave, and gentle spirits went back to God,
hailed, doubtless, with joyful acclamations above, but
leaving a blank and a silence deeply felt on earth.

Hassani, the native interpreter, who was in charge
of the Daisy, and who attempted in vain to recover
the bodies, sailed across the lake, and carried the
mournful tidings to Mr. Wilson. Meanwhile the two
men who escaped remained hid in the bush till the

60 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

next day, when the Daisy returning, they swam off
to her, and being landed at Kagei, carried the news
of What had happened to Unyanyembe, whence it was
sent on by the governor to Zanzibar, and thence
telegraphed to England, reaching the committee on
March 19, 1878. It was not long before that Lieu-
tenant Smith had written :—
‘Wholesome lines are those you sent—

“I know not the way I’m going,
But well do I know my Guide.”

Pray for us all, that we may know Him better and
better until the perfect day. . . . We are truly in the
midst of perils—dangers from within and dangers from
without—pestilence and sword and sea.’

His mind appears to have dwelt much upon the
‘blessed hope’ placed before the believer. Again
he writes, after reporting the first troubles with
Lukongeh :—

‘I am lost in contemplation of that glorious time
when Christ Jesus our Lord shall come and take His
great power and reign, and am fully persuaded that
nothing but such an advent can work so marvellous
a change as the subduing of all wills unto His will,
the making of all hearts His own. . . . We ask prayer
that our hopes, our aims, our desires, may be one—
the glorification of our Lord Jesus Christ, and the
hastening of His kingdom.’

Mr. O’Neill was hoping to return to England shortly,
and take his wife back with him to Africa. Although
Uganda was the goal he aimed at, he was not un-
mindful of the island where he had spent so many
days. But a few days before his murder he wrote
from Kagei :—

‘My stay at Ukerewe has not been altogether un—

THE GOAL REACHED. 61

profitable. I have obtained an insight into the language,
which is more or less spoken on three-fourths of the
lake shore; and I doubt not that I have made some
friends, and prepared the way for the favourable
reception of my successor. . . . I candidly trust the
Lord will send forth many labourers for this portion
of His great harvest.’

But Ukerewe still lacks the presence of those who
proclaim the gospel of peace I

The blow that had fallen on the Mission was far
more crushing than any which could have been anti—
cipated. Of the eight men originally sent out, two
(Dr. John Smith and Mr. James Robertson) had
succumbed to sickness, two (Mr. J. W. Robertson and
Mr. G. J. Clark) had been compelled by ill health to
return home. The hopes of the undertaking seemed
centred in the other four. And now the two leaders
of the expedition had fallen by the hand of the savage,
leaving but two of the eight in Africa, the one alone
in Uganda, the other also alone on the road thither,
many hundreds of miles between them. Strangely,
but brightly prophetic were the words of Dr. Krapf
written to the committee but a few weeks before the
sorrowful news reached Europe :—

‘Many reverses may trouble you, but you have the
Lord's promises. Though many missionaries may fall
in the fight, yet the survivors will pass over the slain
in the trenches, and take this great African fortress for
the Lord.’

And among the many Whose hearts were stirred by
the martyr—death of the devoted missionaries was one
who was hereafter to lay down his own life as a witness
to Africa’s need, and as a precious seed-corn, out of
which the Lord of the harvest made the abundant fruit
to spring forth,—the noble Bishop Hannington.

62 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

‘Ye shall be sorrowful.’ The conflict rages
Between Christ’s servants and the hosts of sin,

And ever thus, throughout the passing ages,
His soldiers fall, unfading crowns to win.

And fall they while the goal still distant lies,
With scarce a word yet spoken for their Lord,
His sweet approval He doth yet accord;
Their ‘feet’ are beauteous in their Master’s eyes.

S. G. S.

CHAPTER V.

SOIVING THE SEED AMID DIFFICULTIES.

‘The seed is the word of God.’—LUKE viii. 1 I.

E must now go back to the solitary missionary
at the court of King Mtesa. A house of tiger-
grass had been erected for the white men about a mile
from the palace. The king was fairly friendly, and
seemed anxious to learn all that Mr. Wilson could
teach him. Regular services were held at the palace
on Sunday mornings, when the king hoisted his ‘flag,’
a ‘nondescript thing, consisting of pieces of red, blue,
and white calico sewn together.’ Passages of Scripture
were read in Kiswahili, and explained by Mr. Wilson,
Mtesa translating What Was said into Luganda, for the
benefit of those unacquainted with the former language.
In these early days the king showed wonderful readiness
to receive the word, and seemed at times thoroughly
impressed by it. On one occasion, after Mr. Wilson
had been speaking of the power of Christ to save, and
urging his hearers to come to Him at once, while there
was time, the king took up the word, and ‘spoke most
eloquently to them, telling them to believe in Christ
now, saying they could only do so in this life; when
they were dead it would be too late.’ And yet he never
came himself !
Troubles arose from time to time, owing to jealousy
63

64 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

of the foreigner on the part of the chiefs, and also to
the Arabs, who had a monopoly of the ivory trade at
the court of Uganda, and who feared. that the influence
of white men would be to their detriment.

Meanwhile, the three months during which Lieutenant
Smith expected to be absent passed away, and still
Mr. Wilson received no tidings of his brethren.

On November 2I, 1877, he writes: ‘As this has
been my first experience of living in solitude, I have
felt rather lonely at times, but lately I have had good
company in the shape of five months’ letters and
papers, which Smith forwarded to me by an Arab, who,
however, took them up to the palace instead of bringing
them to me, and I have had the greatest difficulty in
getting them from the king, having had, as it were, to
drag them, one by one, from him. He has a number
yet, and when I shall get them I don’t know.’

And again on December 22: ‘I am still alone,
and have no news of Smith and O’Neill, and expect I
shall have a solitary Christmas. I am beginning to get
a little alarmed about them, as Smith has been away so
much longer than he intended.’

He was, moreover, in great need of clothes, having
brought but little baggage from Ukerewe, and had to
‘ tax his tailoring skill’ to make himself look respectable.
IIis money, too, or at least such as passed current in
Uganda, was gone, and Mtesa supplied him but scantily
with food.

At length, on December 31, the sorrowful tidings
were brought him by IIassani that his brethren had
been murdered. In a couple more days he had started
for Kagei, accompanied by some men sent by King
Mtesa to ascertain the truth of the story. The voyage
was a perilous one, violent storms alternating with
dead calm, and it took eight days to reach Kagei.

SON/INC? THE SEED AMID DIFFICDLTIES. 65

Here Mr. Wilson met the only survivor of Lieutenant
Smith’s party on the island, the carpenter Sisamani, who
confirmed the story told by Hassani. After repairing
the Daisy, Mr. Wilson started for Unyanyembe, to
purchase fresh cloth and beads, as there was hardly
anything among the stores at Kagei which he could
use as ‘money.’ He hoped also to meet Mr. Mackay,
but was disappointed in this, as the latter had been
hindered in his advance to the lake. The journey was
altogether a trying one, and he arrived back in Uganda
towards the end of March in somewhat impaired health.
Another five months had yet to elapse before he grasped
the hand of the only one of the original party of eight
who still remained in Africa.

In the meantime four new labourers had been
appointed to the Mission. Two artisans, named Sneath
and T ytherleigh, were sent out for the Nyanza, and
Dr. Baxter, with Mr. Copplestone, to take possession
of Mpwapwa. Mr. Mackay having completed his road
to Mpwapwa, returned to the coast, where he found
Sneath and Tytherleigh. The former, however, had
hardly arrived when he became so ill that he was
ordered back to England. The latter rendered great
assistance to Mr. Mackay, who now put into execution
his plan of transporting the stores wanted for the
interior by bullock—waggons to Mpwapwa. The task
was not an easy one, but Mr. Mackay decided that it
was both easier and more economical than employing
a large caravan of porters. Tytherleigh was joined by
Mr. Copplestone, while Mr. Mackay was marching to
and fro, ordering and arranging all that went on, with
unflagging activity and perseverance. Receiving letters
from Mr. Wilson, however, urging him to hasten forward,
he started off, leaving the others to follow, and proceeded
by a route yet untraversed by missionaries. Passing

5

66 ZHE STORY OF UGANDA.

over the Mgunda Mkhali, just then a gigantic swamp
which it took a fortnight to wade through, he at length
reached Uyui, some thirty miles north-east of Unyan-
yembe. Here his spirit was greatly stirred by what
he saw of the slave-trade. ‘ Arab caravans,’ he writes,
‘with tusks of ivory are moving down to the coast
now; and each has, as a supplement, a string of
living little ones trotting on, with their necks linked
together, to be disposed of to the highest bidder at the
coast.’ Here, also, he learned with deep concern from
some men who brought letters from the coast to the
Arab governor, of the death of William Tytherleigh,
who had received an internal sprain, when helping to
push one of the waggons up a hill. This was a great
loss to the Mission, and Mackay, writing later on from
Uganda, says: ‘ Oh for Tytherleigh among us ! If you
can find another Tytherleigh in all England, please
send him out; but his like is not to be every day met
with.’

On June 12, 1878, Mr. Mackay first sighted the
Victoria Nyanza. He writes thus: ‘As eagerly as
ever the ten thousand Greeks shouted “Thalassa!
Thalassa l” in the immortal Anabasz's of Xenophon, did
I gaze on the silvery sea, and thank God that now I
was near the Nyanza at last. For had I not been two
years and more on the way from the coast to Kagei,
and now an end to miserable marching was come, at
least for a time ? Had not my companions succumbed
to the climate one by one, and even reinforcements
failed? Now I was here alone, to hold the fort till
better days should dawn.’

Mr. Wilson, on reaching Uganda, had sent the
Daisy back to Kagei under l—Iassani. Mr. Mackay
found the vessel in great need of repair, and this work,
together with the putting in order of the stores left here

SOIVING THE SEED AJIID DIFFICULTIES. 67

under charge of native servants, occupied some time.
While staying here he resolved to pay a visit to
Lukongeh, at Ukerewe, having heard that the king
desired a Conference with him. His men urged him
not to go, saying Lukongeh would certainly put him to
death; and finding they could not deter him from his
purpose, declined to accompany him. He went alone,
with the exception of an interpreter given him by
Kaduma, the friendly chief of Kagei, leaving his arms
behind, to show that his visit was one of peace.
Lukongeh received him well, and expressed sorrow for
the murder of Smith and O’Neill, making out that the '
matter was not his fault. Returning to Kagei, Mackay
was greeted with great joy by the natives, who had
hardly expected to see him alive again ; but, alas ! ’his
own men, settling it in their minds that he was
murdered, had consumed all his provisions; and the
native food, to which he was obliged to have recourse, -
brought on an illness which detained him some time
longer.

At length Mr. Wilson arrived once more at Kagei,
expecting to find there a caravan under charge of a
native. Instead of that, he tells us: ‘The people of
Kagei crowded round the canoes as we landed in the
dim twilight of the evening, and, on my asking for
news, told me a White man had come. In another
minute Mackay appeared with a hearty welcome. He,
too, had been alone for a long time. We had seen but
little of each other before, but as we talked that night
of all that had passed in those two years, of those who
had fallen, of the reinforcements (come, too, only to
die) which had been, or were to be, sent, of our hopes
and fears, and plans for the future, it seemed as if we
had known each other intimately for years ; hour flew
by after hour unheeded, weariness was forgotten, and

68 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

the cocks began to crow, and grey dawn appeared in
the east, before we were even conscious that it was
growing late.’

The two survivors of the original party started for
Uganda on August 23. The Daisy was wrecked on
the voyage, but the party were hospitably sheltered
by the natives of Usongoro, and after eight weeks
spent in repairing the vessel, they once more set sail,
and shortly after reached Uganda. Mtesa received
them cordially, and gave them a packet which had been
sent on by Dr. Emin Effendi (Emin Pasha), containing,
besides other things, the welcome tidings that three
more missionaries were on their way to the country.

The news of the deaths of Smith and O’Neill had
called forth for the Nyanza Mission three volunteers
from the Church Missionary College, Mr. Pearson, Mr.
Litchfield, and Mr. Hall. It was resolved that these
three, together with Mr. Felkin, a young surgeon who
had already prepared tojoin the Mission, should start at
once; and this time the (geographically) shorter route
by way of the Nile was chosen, Colonel Gordon, then
Governor of the Egyptian Soudan, promising to do all
in his power to assist them on the journey. Mr.
Litchfield was ordained before starting. The party
went by steamer from Suez to Suakim on the Red
Sea, and at once prepared to cross the desert to
Berber, whence they were to proceed up the Nile to
Khartoum. But the intense heat, 980 to 100°, struck
down one of their number, Mr. Hall, and he was com-
pelled, most reluctantly, to return home. The others,
after a trying journey, reached Berber in safety, whence
an Egyptian steamer conveyed them to Khartoum.
Here they were hospitably received and entertained
by Colonel Gordon, who sent them on in one of his
steamers. The voyage, though undertaken under these

SOI'VING THE SEED AMI!) DIFFICULYIES. 69

favourable circumstances, was not unattended with
trouble and danger. The Bahr—el-Zeber, as the river
is called after its junction with the Bahr-el-Abiad
(White Nile), was much encumbered with floating
islands and immense masses of vegetation, large quan-
tities of land having been detached by the floods and
carried northward. This so retarded their progress,
that the voyage from Khartoum to Shambeh, which
ought to have taken fourteen or fifteen days, occupied
sixty—eight, and they were seriously inconvenienced
with respect to food. After leaving Gondokoro they
had to take to small boats, to pass through the rapids,
and the current being very strong, and the river high,
the passage was extremely hazardous. From Bedden
to Dufli they had to march overland. Thence a
steamer conveyed them up to and across the Albert
Nyanza, as far as Magungo, where the Murchison Falls
intervene. The next stretch of road was almost im-
passable, now through high grass, which, when one
man passed through it, swung back on the next with
considerable violence, now over trees and creepers
stretching across the path, now through unwholesome
swamps. Mr. Litchfield and their dragoman were both
attacked by fever, to which the latter succumbed. He
passed away peacefully, expressing his trust in Christ.
To add to this, the attitude of the natives was most
threatening, and their own porters were not to be
depended on. At length they were met by Mr. Wilson,
who had set off immediately on receiving news of their
approach. The journey from Foweira to Mruli, the last
of the stations then under the Egyptian Government,
was made by boat, and thence they were escorted to
Uganda by messengers from King Mtesa, and arrived
February I4, 1879.

During Mr. \Vilson’s absence Mr. Mackay had

70 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

carried on the weekly ‘service’ on Sundays, reading
and explaining the Scriptures in Kiswahili, which the
king translated into the language of Uganda. Further,
Mtesa, who had at first been too jealous to allow his
subjects to learn to read, for fear they should outstrip
himself and his chiefs, now withdrew his prohibition,
and old pupils and young swarmed around Mackay,
eager for instruction. Two workshops sprang up on
the Mission premises, made of wickerwork, plastered
with clay, which excited great admiration. Bullock
training was commenced, Mackay having offered to
build a carriage for the king, which these animals were
to draw. The idle Waganda were astonished to see
the white man at work, making a broad road through
his s/mmba (garden or plantation). Mtesa at this time
showed much interest in the Word of God, and for-
bade any labour on Sunday. He further, after hearing
a lecture from Mackay upon the human body, and a
protest against such a piece of workmanship being sold
for a rag of cloth, actually forbade the sale of slaves!
He- also despatched canoes across the lake to Kagei to
fetch the men who were believed to have arrived to
reinforce the Mission. These were Messrs. Sneath,
Penrose, Stokes, and Copplestone. But Mr. Sneath
had been again invalided home, and Mr. Penrose, an
artisan, had been attacked and slain by rztga—ruga
(robbers), while conducting a caravan to the lake, thus
making the sixth who had fallen since the Mission
began.

By the arrival of Messrs. Stokes and Copplestone
the party in Uganda was increased to seven a larger
number of Church Missionary Society missionaries
than have been there at any subsequent period till
the arrival of Bishop Tucker and his party in Decem-
ber 1890. But opposition was not slow to arise. On

 

SOIVING THE SEE!) AMID DIFFICULTIES. 71

February 23, 1879, a party of French Jesuit priests
arrived from Algiers, sent out by the Society of Notre
Dame d'Afrique, under the then Archbishop of Algiers,
now Cardinal Lavigerie. The presents they brought
for the king were exactly of such a nature as to please
him, including guns, swords, and gunpowder. They
immediately took up a position hostile to the Church
Missionary Society missionaries, refusing to kneel for
prayer at their Sunday services, and denouncing them
to the king as liars, who taught a false religion. Mr.
Mackay endeavoured to show the king the principal
points in which their teaching differed, appealing to
the ‘Book’ for judgment as to which was right; but
Mtesa was sorely perplexed, and the chiefs remarked
that ‘Every white man has a different religion.’ Not
long after some messengers from Zanzibar brought
a letter to the king from the British Consul there,
Dr. (now Sir John) Kirk. This letter was mistrans—
lated to the king by the Arabs, who were sworn
enemies of the Mission, and made to appear as though
it cast reflections both on the character of the mission-
aries and their honesty of purpose. A very trying
time followed for them; the king’s manner towards
them changed, and he often refused to see them. One
day, hearing that the French priests were ill, Mackay
and Litchfield set off with some medicine to visit them,
little thinking into what danger they were running.
Mr. Felkin thus describes the occurrence :—-

‘As they went by the palace a man came to them,
and told their boys that if they went to the Frenchmen
they would all get tied up. They thought nothing
of this, and went on their way, but soon saw armed
men rush past them, and in a short time were brought
to a standstill by some thirty or forty men, dancing
and brandishing their spears and clubs. They were

72 TIJE STORY OF UGANDA.

told to go forward, and at once were surrounded.
Mackay saw that they were in great danger, and
instantly sat down, calling on Litchfield to do the
same, as this is the only chance, it seems, with natives.
They then asked what was the meaning of it all, and
were told it was the king’s order. “Then we will go
to the king,” Mackay said. When they reached the
palace they sent in to say they must see the king
at once. No answer was returned, and after waiting
a due season, they left.’

Later on, after a visit to the palace, they heard that
the soldiers were desirous to kill them, and only waited
the king’s orders to do it. But however Mtesa’s mind
may have been poisoned against them by Arab influence,
he had a strong reason for not proceeding to extremities,
as he was suffering much in his health, and was receiving
medical attention from Mr. Felkin. In spite of this,
the situation became more and more trying and embar-
rassing, and the missionaries found it even difficult
to obtain food for their daily need. Under these
circumstances they proposed to withdraw from the
Mission for a time, and requested permission from the
king to leave. This, however, he was unwilling to
give; but at length he recurred to his intention, already
conceived, of sending an embassy to Queen Victoria
with one of the missionaries. Three men, by name
Namkadi, Kafitaruba, and Sawaddu, were chosen for
this purpose, and in May they started on their journey,
under the guidance of Mr. Wilson and Mr. Felkin.
Of their journey to and sojourn in England, where
much kindness was shown them, and their reception
by the Queen, we need not speak here. As far as
can be seen, the event was barren of any permanent
results, and Namkadi afterwards distinguished himself
by his enmity to the missionaries and to their work.

SOW/NG THE SEED AflIID DIFFICULTIES. 73

The Church Missionary Society Committee having
sanctioned the occupation of Uyui as a Mission station,
it was thought best that Messrs. Stokes and Copplestone
should return thither and commence work. Mr. Pearson
accompanied them as far as Kagei, whence it was
needful to fetch some stores; and meanwhile, from
June to November 1879, Mackay and Litchfield were
alone together in Uganda. A sudden change came
over Mtesa’s attitude towards them, and these few
months were full of encouragement.

Mr. Litchfield wrote: ‘Peace is upon us, and there
is a wonderful change from the days of our troubles
here; in fact, it is like clear sunshine after storm.
Mtesa is now taking up the question of education in
earnest, and is ordering all his chiefs, Baiongole (offi—
cials), pages, and soldiers, to learn the alphabet, etc.,
in English characters. Mackay and myself are never
free from learners, some of whom are waiting with the
daylight. We have our hands full of work to supply
them with brain food, and the small printing—press sent
out with us from England is in daily requisition. . . .
Mackay and myself are now on visiting terms with
every chief in the capital without an exception, and not
a day passes without our house being filled with visitors.
You can think how all this cheers our hearts, and makes
us praise Him who has wrought this change. In medi-
cine, too, there has been some progress, as last month’s
journal shows over two hundred cases, most of which
are cures.’

And again he gives us the following interesting
glimpse of his ‘home’ and daily life: ‘I have built
myself a house—the floor is the earth, the walls tiger—
grass, the roof thatch, with three rooms, and lock and
key doors. Ist room, reception hall, dispensary, school—
room, and hospital; 2nd, storeroom and kitchen; 3rd,

74 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

saizcium sanctomm and bedroom. I battered the floor
smooth with a wooden log, and cut holes in the wall
for windows, and now it is AI, ne plus ullra. Between
July and December 1879 I was very busy build-
ing, digging, trench-making, road-levelling, planting,
printing, dispensing, teaching, translating, making a
vocabulary, learning the language, washing, ironing,
brick-making, candle-making, and a host of other light
and trifling tasks. You would not have known me in
the dirty-fisted, clayey individual I was. More than
fifty men and boys came daily for instruction to me,
and I had taken part through St. John’s Gospel, and
we were finishing I Kings.’

And in his journal we find the following touching
entry: ‘Went, as I had promised, to see my patients
at Monoculia’s1 house. As this chief seemed anxious
to talk on religion, I tried to explain the death, resur-
rection, and love of Christ to him in my poor, broken,
stammering language. After a while he went out and
sent a slave to fetch me. I went to him and found him
in a very small hut on his knees, and he asked me to
pray. I said I did not know Swahili, but he said,
“ Pray in English; God understands you.” And I did
so, deeply moved by the scene.’

Again he describes a service held in Mtesa’s house,
and says: ‘The king seemed to take a great interest,
and translated faithfully for his chiefs. He reminded
me of a father surrounded by his children, more than
a king by his subjects. His pages sat around his bed,
and it was difficult to think we were in the centre of
Africa amongst a savage nation.’

The king even asked for baptism; but he could not
comply with the conditions necessary to its being
granted. With all the undoubted fine qualities of

1 \Ve shall hear of this man later on, under the name of Isaya.

SOWING THE SEED AMID DIFFICULTIES. 75

which he was possessed, and the evident hold which
the Word of God for a time obtained upon him, his
history is a sad illustration of the words : ‘ How hardly
shall they that have riches enter into the kingdom of
God,’ and ‘ If any man love the world, the love of the
Father is not in him.’

And the missionaries had yet to wait before one ripe
ear should be gathered of the precious seed sown early
and late.

‘We must leave it for a while,
The seed which we have sown;
The spring-tide will not smile
Until wintiy months have flown:
:g * a: $ =l=
Yet not seeing, we believe
In a word which cannot die;
Our times with God we leave;
\Ve must wait till by-and—by.’

A ill/1137‘ (yr ‘ C ofxlej' A Mia/5. ’

CHAPTER VI.

THE SEED SPRINGING UP.

‘ I have planted, Apollos watered; but God gave the increase.’—
I COR. iii. 6.

ITHERTO the hindrances to missionary work in
Uganda had arisen partly from the enmity of
the Mohammedans, partly from the capricious character
of the king, partly from the adhesion to old customs by
the chiefs and people, and partly also from the contrary
influence brought to bear on Mtesa by the Romish
priests. But in the beginning of the year 1880 another
foe rose up to dispute the claims of the Gospel of Christ.
This was the lubarc of the lake.

It has been already mentioned that the religion (if
such a name may be applied to it) of Uganda consisted
mainly in a superstitious reverence of various lubarcs
or spirits, who were supposed to reside in the persons
of living men, and who had to be propitiated by charms
and offerings. The most venerated of these was the
Zubare of the lake, concerning whom Mackay thus wrote
in January : ‘ For several months I have found the
word lubarc more or less in every one’s mouth. Many
spoke the name with awe, while others refused to say
anything good or bad of such a being. At last I learned
that the lubare was really a spirit, but was personified
in an individual an old woman—who lives on the lake.

Month after month a lot of half—caste traders have
76

 

THE SEED SPRINGING UP. 77

been trying to get away to Unyamyembe, but each time
they went to find canoes they returned to the capital.
It appeared that the lubare was about to pay a visit to
this quarter, and no communication was to be allowed
on the lake till the spirit returned home.’

This same lubare had hindered Mr. Pearson’s landing
in the usual place on his return from Kagei, and com-
pelled him to take a long and circuitous route instead.
Mukassa, as the witch was called, was now comingr
with a train of followers to the capital, and was expected
to cure the king of his sickness, and presents of food,
cattle, etc., were sent to her on the road. Mackay felt
that this was a sad return to heathenism on the part of
the king, and day by day endeavoured to show him the
folly and wickedness of such a course. Such was his
zeal that he earned for himself the title of Anti-Mukassa,
‘ which, however,’ he says, ‘ has no reference to a sofa
cushion !’ Mtesa now agreed with, and now turned a
deaf ear to Mackay's arguments and appeals; and the
chiefs, although many of them had been sufficiently
enlightened to see the folly of Mukassa’s claims, sup:
ported her coming to the capital. The matter was
pressed on the king by his female relatives, particularly
the namaso/e, or queen-mother, and he told his chiefs
that they would now leave both the Arab’s and the
muzungu’s (white man’s) religion, and go back to the
religion of their fathers. This announcement apparently
gave great pleasure to all. But Mackay wrote :—

‘To-day the chiefs followed each other like sheep,
yet I am convinced that several present would have
chosen quite the contrary, were they not afraid of each
other. . . . I do not feel discouraged, only disappointed
for the time. No power can stand against that of the
cross of Christ.’

In the court of the palace three huts were erected,

78 THE STORY OF‘ UGANDA.

one for the lubare Mukassa, the others for the repre-
sentatives of two other deities or spirits. A noisy
procession passed up the road to the palace, and the
lubares were received by the king with all honour.
Nothing, however, came of their visit, save the con-
sumption of an enormous amount of native beer. The
[ubm'e Mukassa was said to have predicted war in the
country from the presence of strangers—not immedi-
ately, but within four or five years. ‘I am sure,’
wrote Mackay, ‘ Mtesa will feel much ashamed of last
week’s performance.’

Then the tide, which had set strongly against the
missionaries, turned again in their favour. The chiefs
became friendly once more, and pupils returned. And
we find Mtesa himself saying to his subjects, ‘Why
are you not continuing to learn to read ? You are all
trying only to gather riches for this world. You had
better prepare for the world to come !’

In June 1880 it became evident that the state of
Mr. Litchfield's health would no longer permit him to
remain in Uganda, and he had to say farewell to the
work, in which, despite its trials and difficulties, he had
found much to rejoice his heart. The good seed had
been carefully and prayerfully sown, and though as
yet there was no distinct case of conversion, he could
tell of the readiness of the ‘ common people,’ as of old,
to hear the good tidings, and of ‘numbers of instances
where the hearers had testified their astonishment and
joy at the love of Jesus in dying for them.’ He
removed to Uyui, where he remained for some time
working with Mr. Copplestone, whom he found just
recovering from an attack of fever. Mr. Mackay had
accompanied him thither, in order to obtain supplies.
In returning he was detained for some time at Kagei,
being unable to obtain canoes for the voyage.

THE SEED SPRINGING UP. 79

It was now Mr. Pearson’s turn to be alone in
Uganda, and a time it was, not merely of loneliness,
but of trial and privation. The king now took another
turn, and professed himself a Mohammedan. Mr.
Pearson says :—

‘ He had a dream, and saw ten moons with another
moon larger and brighter than the rest, which went on
waxing until it had attained an enormous size. The
ten moons then came and paid homage to it. While
Mtesa was wondering what this meant, two heavenly
messengers appeared to him, and with a look of anger,
which made him terrified, demanded why he had
ceased to say “Allah Akbar," ordering him, if he
wished to retain his prosperity, and see his country
increase, to return to his old custom, and cry “ Allah
Akbar " every day, as directed by the Koran.’

Mtesa then ordered all his court to say ‘Allah
Akbar,’ and repeat their Mohammedan prayers in the
place that had been used for Christian services. He
also gave up hoisting his flag and having a gun fired
off on Sundays, the things, writes Mr. Pearson, ‘in
which his Christianity consisted.’

As a natural consequence the missionary found him-
self neglected; and despite the medical and surgical
services he was constantly rendering to one and
another, he was often in want of the necessaries of
life. He writes in July :—

‘I have the greatest difficulty in procuring food. I
have a very small quantity of shells (cowries) left, and
no cloth. Clothing has gone, one article after another
(for the purchase of food), until now the question
becomes serious. OccasionallyI have a few bananas
sent me by a chief, but this is rare. Some of the
sweet potatoes which I planted have come up, and
given us a meal or two. . . . For one or two days we

80 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

were in great straits, but the good Lord sent enough.
Mufta asked Mtesa for some of the shells owing to
me. He promised to send them, but after waiting and
hungering some days, he went again, and told the
king if he did not send me some food or something
to buy food with, I and my boys would be found
dead. This frightened him, and he sent 2,000 cowries,
adding that he would send all when his wife, who had
charge of the shells, came home. Chambalango, whom
I had attended, as well as one of his wives, sent me
a goat and a few bunches of bananas, upon learning
the destitute state that I was in. One of the native
workmen whom I had taught a few things brought me
a goat. Two other goats came from the katz'kz'ro for
repairing and re-silvering two mirrors. I simply placed
my destitution before the Lord, and He sent me food
in a most marked, unlooked-for manner. To Him be
all the glory !’

For some days Mr. Pearson was occupied in putting
up a flagstaif for the king, in which work he was
hindered and thwarted by a jealous official. At length
he was successful, and Mtesa was much pleased. ‘I
reached home,’ writes Pearson, ‘Very late, tired out,
every bone aching. Queer missionary work i ’

But he was not without encouragement. Two boys,
Luta, son of a chief, and Mukassa, the keeper of the
‘ church’ or ‘mosque,’ came often to learn from him.
The latter refused to go to the Mohammedan prayers
when the chiefs went, and said that the religion of
Jesus, which the white man taught, was the only true
religion, all others being lies. And now came the first
beginning of religious persecution: the bold lad was
put in the stocks; and shortly after he and Luta were
both seized and sent off bound to the country. And
Mr. Pearson writes :—

THE SEED SPRIIVGIA’G UP. 81

‘Alas! now I have no scholars. The interdict is
still upon our teaching, and no one comes since Luta
and Mukassa were taken off. Lord, clear the way.
Give me an open door. Do Thou indeed enable us to
light Thy candle in Uganda, which shall never be put
out.’

How fully has this prayer been answered !

At length Mr. Mackay reappeared in Uganda, having
obtained a passage from Kagei in the boats sent by the
king to fetch a fresh company of Romish priests. He
found Mtesa, who had heard of the kind reception given
to his chiefs in England, purposing to go thither himself;
and even appointing Namasole, the queen-mother, to
reign in his absence. This plan being given up, he
insisted on the missionaries obtaining a daughter of
Queen Victoria to be his wife !

Then followed a fresh trouble. Some Arabs, newly
arrived from the coast, made up a wicked tale about
Mr. Mackay, and told the king that he was an insane
murderer who had fled from England, that in Zanzibar
he had committed more murders, that he had tried to
shoot the Governor of Unyanyembe, and that he had
been on his knees to them, to implore them not to
reveal his crimes to the king! This was repeated to
the missionaries by the French priests, who heard it at '
baraza (the court). Whatever Mtesa may have thought
of the story, it suited his purpose to affect to believe it ;
for though not willing to part with the Englishmen
who were so useful to him, he did not want their
religion, and he wanted to keep in favour with the
Arabs, who hated them.

Mr. Mackay writes: ‘We can now understand to
the full the meaning of that blessing which we are
promised when men shall revile us and persecute us,
and shall say all manner of evil against us falsely, for

6

82 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

His sake. We are His, and it matters not what man
can do to us.’

But the return of the Baganda envoys from England,
accompanied by Mr. Stokes and the Rev. P. O’Flaherty,
caused the tide to turn again for awhile. They arrived
in, March 1881. Mr. O’Flaherty gained considerable
influence with Mtesa, and from his knowledge of the
Koran was enabled to meet the Arabs on their own
ground and confound them. In June the interdict on
the foreigners’ teaching was removed; crowds again
flocked to the missionaries, and their work went on
vigorously.

And now the time drew on when the missionaries’
hearts were to be gladdened by the sight of precious
fruit from the patient seed-sowing of five years.
During the time that Mr. Mackay was alone in Uganda,
while Mr. Wilson went to meet the Nile party, he had
taught a lad named Sembera to read; he was a slave
of one of the chiefs, the same who had begged Mr.
Litchfield to pray with him. He was most diligent in
learning, and in time read through one or two Gospels,
the Acts, the Books of Kings, and many Psalms,
besides one or two Epistles (in Kiswahili). He had
been allowed by his master to accompany Mr. Mackay
to Uyui, and was of great assistance to him on the
journey. On his return, he was away for some time
with his master in a distant part of the country, but
was now and then able to visit the missionaries.

Mr. Mackay writes on October 8, 1881 : ‘To—day he
(Sembera) brought me a note written by himself, and
very legibly, although he has never had a lesson in
writing—written in Luganda, with a pointed piece of
spear-grass and some ink of dubious manufacture. It
ran thus, “ Bwana Mackay, Sembera has come with
compliments, and to give you great news. Will you

TIJE SEED SI’ICINGING UP. 83

baptize him, because he believes the words of Jesus
Christ?” He says he does not fear any danger of
being caught and killed, should he be baptized. Mr.
O'Flaherty has had a long talk with him, and promises
to baptize him by-and-by. To my knowledge his life
is exemplary, and his understanding and reception of
Christian truth very good for his limited opportunities.’

But before this convert was enrolled among the
members of the Church militant, another, unknown at
the time, entered the company of the Church trium-
phant. The story is given in Mr. Mackay’s journal :—

‘Not long ago there died one of the lads who had
been reading with Mr. O’Flaherty. He was ill, and
for a while we missed him ; then we heard that he was
dead. His name was Dumurila, being lame of a foot,
and slave of Mongobya. He used to show great
eagerness, not only to learn to read, but to become
acquainted with the truth itself. . . . The other day,
when waiting in the court precincts, Mr. O’Flaherty
was accosted by a lad, who handed him a Swahili
Gospel, saying that it was given him by Dumurila, to
return to the muzzmgu. This lad’s story was most
affecting. He said that he used to be a most ardent
follower of the lubare, but he had recently come to
leave his old superstition, and in proof of what he said,
he showed Mr. O’Flaherty that he had no longer any
charms about him. He continued that his friend
Dumurila had asked him to come to us for medicine,
but he was afraid, as he did not know us. The sick
lad had assured him that we would certainly either go
to him or send him medicine. All day long he read in
the Gospel which he had (St. Mark), and when he
found himself in so much pain that he expected to die,
he charged this lad to bring back the Gospel to Mr.
O’Flaherty without fail, He then asked the lubare lad

8.; THE STORY OF UGANDA.

to go and fetch some water from a pool near. When
the water was brought he bade his companion sprinkle
some on his head, and name over him the names of
the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost. Soon after
that he died. I do believe that this baptism by a
lubare lad has been written in heaven. It seems to
have much moved the lad who told the story, for he

professes to have lost his faith in the lubare, . . . and
wishes to come to learn to know the Book of Jesus
Christ. . . . The Word of God takes root where least

expected, and brings forth riper fruit than our un-
believing hearts had looked to see.’

On March 18, 1882, Sembero Kumunba, with four
other lads, were received into the visible Church of
Christ by baptism. The former received the name of
Mackay. Another of the five was Mukassa, the lad
who had been keeper of the church, or mosque, and
who was put in the stocks, and afterwards bound and
sent into the country, for saying that Christianity was
the only true religion. He received the baptismal name
of Filipo (after Mr. O’Flaherty). The others were named
Henri Raiti (Henry Wright), Edward, and Yakobo
(Jacob). About the same time a sixth lad was baptized
at Zanzibar. This was Luta (or Duta), the boy who
was bound and sent away with Mukassa. He had
been released, and allowed in March 1881 to accompany
Mr. Pearson to the coast, and the latter had left him
at Zanzibar, under the care of the Universities’ Mission.
On Easter Day 1882 he was baptized.

Many others were eager to follow the example of
the five. A chief who had heard the word began to
teach his women, and came with a boy and his mandala,
or priest, to Mr. O'Flaherty for further instruction.
The mandzva threw away his priest's robe and his
charms, and professed himself a believer in Jesus, the

THE SEED SPRINGING UP. 85

Son of God. The chief had to return to his post in
the country, but he sent the mmm’wa one day with a
present, and a request that Mr. O'Flaherty would visit
him and his people. teach them more fully, and baptize
them. This, however, was not possible at the time.
Mr. O’Flaherty wrote :—

‘The day the priest came here there was a large
crowd of people gathered, and many priests and people
of [Marc also. When the proper time came, the mandwa
got up like another Peter “in the midst,” and stated,
with the force and eloquence of an Apollos, the reasons
that forced him to burn his charms, and reject the
service of lubarc for the noble service of the Son of
God. All were moved, and many went away pricked
to the heart.’

One most interesting case was that of a young man
named Mwira, who came and begged to be allowed to
remain with the missionaries while they taught him.
Slower than many at learning, he made up for this by
his eagerness, joy beaming in his face as he mastered
each new thought. Before he went home he thus
expressed himself to Mr. O’Flahertyz—

‘ I am like a man travelling in a mountainous country.
He climbs and passes ridge after ridge with pleasure.
But as he surmounts he looks before him to the
heights beyond, each one loftier than those he has
passed, and he becomes impatient, and wonders to
himself if he will ever surmount the last. But there
is one great difference. The traveller, in his desire,
hastens from the summit of one ridge to descend, that
he may climb another height; thence he hastens on,
till he climbs the last and highest. Not so I. WhenI
climb, I like to lie on the top and rest, and enjoy the
others before. Yes, I like to rest, and drink of the
fountains that gush forth as I climb. Oh the pleasure

86 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

of reading and thinking upon those delightful books,
and of meditating on the wonders of the Son of God
becoming Man to save men from lubare !’

Having-been some little while at home, he returned
to the Mission, bringing his wife and little child. His
wife he had already taught to read, but wanted more
instruction for her. One morning she asked for a hoe,
that she might labour in the missionaries’ plantation,
saying, ‘ I do not wish to eat your generous bread for
nothing.’ They were baptized under the names of
Yohana (John) and Maryamu (Mary), and shortly
afterwards, at their own request, married to one another
after the manner of the Prayer-Book.

Two other young couples were married about the
same time ‘in Christ’s way,’ as they termed it.

Filipo Mukassa had brought his wife to be instructed.
‘She was at first,’ says Mr. O’Flaherty, ‘a haughty
savage, and would not touch our food.’ She, however,
joined a ladies’ class which had been formed ‘with
much fear, and faith, and prayer,’ and though at first
she asked in amazement, ‘Can women learn?’ she
soon found herself making progress, and after some
time she begged to be baptized, together with her
child. ‘Nothing,’ writes Mr. O’Flaherty, ‘ has testified
to the reality of the change more than the way she
conducts herself. I found her one day working in the
plantation with the other women. I said, “Sarah,
who told you to work? I thought you were above
working.” She said, “I cannot wash or sew like my
sisters in England; I wish I could; but I can prune
and hoe, and the plantains which feed us require both.
It is my duty to assist in feeding this great family.“

There were two young men in the king’s household
who were to be baptized with others on July 12, 1883.
But two days Lefore the time they were smitten with

THE SEED SPRINGING UP. 87

the plague, and were, according to custom, carried
away, and left to die. They sent at once for Mr.
O’Flaherty, who writes :—

‘I hastened to them ; the place was deserted. After
a few words and a short prayer, I sent the messenger
to the river for water, and poured it on the first,
Makassa, in the name of the Blessed Trinity. I shall
never forget the look up to heaven, and the words,
among many others, to the effect that, although he
was leaving an earthly palace, he was going to the
palace in heaven; and turning to his friend, he said,
“Jesus our Saviour is our King.” His hands were
clasped in mine, but in a paroxysm of burning agony
he relaxed his grasp and gave up the ghost. Turning
to my other friend, I found him already in the throes
of dcath. I did not put the water on him, but I felt
his name was entered in the baptismal register of
heaven.’

Altogether these two years, 1882 and 1883, were a
time of encouragement. There were so many to be
taught that three African teachers were regularly
employed—Henry Wright Duta, Filipo, and a young
Swahili from Zanzibar, besides three others when
necessary. ‘We have,’ writes Mr. O’Flaherty, ‘a
text—book of theology, the Lord’s Prayer, Creed, Deca-
logue, texts of Scripture so arranged that they teach
the plan of salvation, and the duties of a subject to his
sovereign, and sovereign to subject, and all to Christ.’
All these had been printed by Mackay——three hundred
copies, besides an equal number of alphabetical spell-
ing—sheets in Luganda—‘no small work,’ writes Mr.
O’Flaherty, ‘on a toy-press.’ Morning service was
conducted daily at the ‘chapel’ between 6 and 7 a.m.,
by the Rev. R. P. Ashe (who arrived in Uganda in
April 1883), Henry Wright Duta reading the lessons;

88 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

besides there were two regular services on Sunday,
and the chapel was full to overflowing, both with men
and women.

The daughters of the king himself now became
anxious to learn. His favourite daughter fell despe-
rately ill. She was immediately surrounded by a troop
of lubare priests and doctors, but they could do nothing
for her, and at length Mr. O’Flaherty was summoned.
He turned out the lubare priests, and his treatment was
blessed to the cure of the apparently dying girl. Not
long after another of the princesses visited him, saying
that both she and her sister wanted his instruction, but
had hitherto been afraid to come, but that What he had
done for her sister had encouraged her, and she was
now determined to learn the words and religion of
Jesus Christ. She was baptized in September, with
five other persons. The girl who had been cured of
her sickness appeared to receive the truth into her
heart, but later on she was carried off by small-pox.
Mwira, or Yohana, the convert above mentioned, taught
many others, and one of his friends, Samweli, was
baptized towards the end of the year. In October
1883 twenty-one Christians of Uganda assembled to-
gether at the Lord’s table to commemorate His death,
for the first time. ‘I wish,’ writes Mr. O’Flaherty,
‘you were here to see the reverence, and share in our
joy.’ The following year another of Mtesa’s daughters
was baptized; but these princesses did not prove alto-
gether satisfactory. Another of those admitted into
the Church was Sebwato, the chief above mentioned,
whose mandwa had cast away his charms. He received
the name of Nikodemo.

The small-pox, which ravaged the country in the
beginning of 1884, carried off one of the first converts,
Filipo Mukassa. When he died his brothers came to

THE SEED SPRINGING UP. 89

take away the body, but his wife Sarah supported Mr.
O’Flaherty in his refusal to let it go, on the ground
that the dead man was his brother by a more lasting
tie than that of nature. Thus Filipo received the first
Christian burial in Uganda. When the brothers ‘saw
the fine grave, and the beautiful bark-cloth, and the
fine white linen (bufla) that were to form his shroud
and winding—sheet, they consented, and they went and
wound him up, and helped to carry him to the grave
by lantern and lamplight. Mr. Ashe read the Creed
and a short service, and they retired and came to me
and said, “You have buried him a chief; we wish to
be your brothers also.” ’

Another interesting case was that of a blacksmith,
called W alukaga, with whom Mackay had made friends
while engaged in one of those tasks which fell so
constantly to his lot. Concerning this manual labour
he once wrote :—

‘I suppose that my desire to devote most, if not all of
my time to studying the languages, teaching, translat-
ing, and conversing with natives, instead of working in
wood, and iron, and clay, is just what every man who
comes here will feel.’

But he went on, ‘All intercourse with the natives
helps one to acquire a knowledge of their tongue, and
a complete mastery of that is necessary to be able to
teach them aright. The Gospel of our glorious Lord
should not be turned to ridicule by our broken utter—
ance, when increased diligence can make us fluent
speakers.’

And as he did the secular work for Christ’s sake, so
was it blessed to the promotion of the spiritual work.
I Ie had been requested by Mtesa, on the death of the
queen-mother, Namasole, to make the coffin, or rather
three coffins for her, the outer one of which was nearly

90 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

as large as the enormous grave dug to receive the
remains. It was in doing this work that Mackay
became acquainted with Walukaga, who afterwards
used to come and read with him. Walukaga was bap—
tized with three others on September 21, and gave the
missionaries much joy by his earnestness. Altogether,
up to the end of 1884, there were eighty-eight baptisms,
a blessed harvest from the seed sown during seven
years in faith and patience.

For wand’ring feet now treading
\Vith joy the heavenward way;

For lips Thy glories spreading
\Ve bless Thee, Lord, to-day.

CHAPTER VII.

THE BEGINNING OF PERSECUTION.

‘They overcame him by the blood of the Lamb, and by the word
oftheir testimony; and they loved not their lives unto the death.’——
Rizv. xii. II.

IIILIS the first-fruits were being gathered in

Uganda, the committee at home were not
unmindful of the needs of the Mission, nor of the
importance of reinforcing the brethren who held this
far-off outpost. In May 1882 a party of six mission-
aries left England for the Nyanza. These were the Rev.
James Hannington of Brighton, the Rev. R. P. Ashe,
of St. John’s College, Cambridge, the Revs. J. Blackburn,
E. C. Gordon, and W. J. Edmonds, of Islington College,
and Mr. C. Wise, an artisan. It was the deaths of
Shergold Smith and O’Neill (as already mentioned)
which first roused in the heart of James Hannington
a desire to go out to the Victoria Nyanza, and follow
up the work begun by them. In a far more literal
manner than he could have foreseen, he was to follow
in their footsteps, by giving, not the work of many
years of life, but the far—spreading and deeply telling
influence of a martyr’s death, to the cause he had at
heart. For some time the wish remained hidden in his
own heart, or revealed only to her who was his true
helpmeet in the Master’s work. In November 1881 he
wrote in his journal: ‘It does not seem to me possible

91

92 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

that the Church Missionary Society would accept me.
I am not worthy of the honour.’

But on receiving a letter from the Honorary
Secretary of the Society, Mr. Wigram, on the subject,
he no longer hesitated, but at once sent in his offer of
service for four years, on condition of the Society
supplying his place at St. George’s Chapel, Hurstpier-
point, purposing to go out, for the most part, at his own
expense. The offer was gladly accepted, and he was
appointed leader of the expedition.

The party reached Zanzibar on June 19, and Mr.
Stokes having made all preparations for the journey
to the lake, the caravan started on the 26th for the
mainland, and thence by Mombasa and Mpwapwa across
the plains of Ugogo, to Uyui. They took with them
Henry Wright Duta, who had lately been baptized
at Zanzibar, and who was attached to Hannington
as his ‘boy’ on the march. While passing through
Ugogo Hannington was attacked by violent fever, and
underwent intense suffering. Nevertheless he marched
on bravely, reaching Uyui, however, in a state of
great prostration. Here he was seized with dysen-
tery, and it was decided by the rest of the party that
they must not attempt to take him on with them to the
lake. He was accordingly left behind under charge of
Mr. Copplestone, and of his nephew, Mr. Gordon; not
long after acute rheumatism was added to his other
sufferings, and it seemed impossible that he could live.
In spite of his condition, he employed himself in drawing
up a manual of information for future missionaries
starting for Africa; and one day, being able to walk a
short distance, he went and chose a spot for a grave,
which he believed would shortly receive his earthly
tabernacle.

Contrary to all expectation, the caravan which had

T1115 BEGINA’ING 0F PERSECUTION. 93

left him behind returned again to Uyui, the party (con-
sisting of Stokes, Gordon, Ashe, and Wise, Messrs.
Edmonds and Blackburn remaining to occupy Uyui)
having met with such unreasonable demands for 1101ng
on the road taken, that Mr. Stokes resolved to seek a
new one. When Hannington heard the voice of the
caravan leader, it seemed to inspire him with new life.
‘ I shall live, and not die!’ he exclaimed, feeling sure
the providence of God had led them back that he might
accompany them. After consultation a hammock was
prepared for him, and carried by porters he proceeded
on with them towards the lake. The route chosen by
Stokes lay west of the old one, and led them through
the country of the famous Mirambo. Urambo, the
capital of this potentate, where there was a station of
the London Missionary Society, had been visited by
Mr. Litchfield during his stay at Uyui. Mirambo him-
self was absent at the time, but Mr. Litchfield had been
told that caravans could pass that way to the lake
without paying the lzongo extorted on other routes.
Mirambo had been subsequently visited by Mr.
Copplestone.

The chief of Urambo received the party favourably,
and gave them a headman to conduct them to the last
village in his territory, Kwa Sonda, or Msalala, on Smith
Sound, the western arm of the inlet called Jordan’s
Nullah. Here an invitation reached them from Rwoma,
chief of Buzinja, to the north of Msalala, promising
them canoes in which to cross the lake. The promise,
however, was not kept, and the missionaries were glad
to make their escape from the country of the false chief.
Hannington had now in some measure revived, and not
only made the'journey into Rwoma’s country, but for
a while had the whole burden of the expedition on his
hands, Mr. Stokes having returned to Uyui, and the

94 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

other missionaries being ill. He established Mr. Wise
at Kagei, and then leaving him there with Mr. Gordon
he returned to Msalala in terrible suffering. Finding,
at length, that it was utterly impossible for him to
proceed further, he took a sorrowful farewell of Mr.
Ashe and Duta, turned his face from the lake, and
started for the coast. ‘My eyes,’ writes Mr. Ashe,
‘followed the tall receding figure, now indeed bowed
with the intense pain and suffering he had undergone,
and I wondered, as I watched him, whether he would
ever accomplish the long eight hundred miles of swamp
and wilderness, with its certain toils and unknown
perils, which lay between him and Zanzibar.’ In much
pain and weakness, however, the journey was accom-
plished, contrary to the expectations of his porters,
who more than once left him, as they thought, to die.
Mr. Blackburn came from Uyui to meet him, and
accompanied him to the coast, returning afterwards to
his station. And so at length home was once more
reached, and gradually health was given back by the
Great Physician, who, as Captain of the host of the
Lord, had yet work for him to do. Mr. Edmonds was
compelled by ill health shortly to return home also.

Meanwhile Hannington had left behind him on the
shores of the lake not only the two missionaries Gordon
and Wise (Mr. Ashe having shortly after started for
Uganda in some canoes of King Mtesa’s), but also a
silent yet substantial memorial of his journey thither.
This was a mission boat to replace the Daisy. Before
leaving England he had made an appeal for funds to
provide the vessel, and it had been carried up country
by porters, and left at Msalala until it could be put
together and launched. This was done, after an infinity
of toil and trouble, by Mr. Mackay.

The latter, after the arrival of Mr. Ashe in Uganda,

THE BEGINZVING 0F I’ERSECUTIOIV. 95

left him there with M1‘._O'Flaherty, and proceeded to
the south of the lake, landing at Kagei, where he found
Mr. Gordon and Mr. Wise. The new route taken by
the last expedition to the lake rendered it advisable to
remove the Mission stores from Kagei to some more
suitable place; and the spot chosen was the place
where Hannington had stayed, Msalala, which became
for some time the head-quarters of the Mission. On
examining the pieces of the vessel brought there by
Hannington they were found to be in a deplorable
condition. The boards had been left packed together
in a tent, but in the absence of the missionaries the
chief of the place had taken away the tent and thrown
out the boards, and Mackay found them ‘lying warping,
splitting, and shrinking under a blazing sun.’ Even a
skilled workman like Mr. Wise thought it a hopeless
task to attempt to make anything of them. But Mackay
was not to be daunted. He resolved that the thing
should be done. But the question was, Where should
the boat be built and launched? The upper part of
Smith Sound, near Msalala, is choked up with papyrus,
and to go further north on the western shore would
bring them into the territory of the false chief Rwoma.
The pieces of the boat were accordingly carried across
the sound at a place called Muleshi’s Ferry, into the
country of Urima, on the eastern shore (between the
two arms of Jordan’s Nullah). Much difficulty was
now experienced in obtaining permission from the king
to build the boat there. He fancied the missionaries
would bewitch him with a look, and then carry off his
spirit, to make a show of it to the white men at the
coast! Mackay’s perseverance, however, triumphed
over every obstacle, and at length, on December 3,
1883, the Eleanor was launched on the shining waters
over which she was to bear the messengers of peace.

96 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

In addition to her English name Mackay gave her an
Arabic one, Mirembe, or ‘Peace.’ The name was to
speak to the natives of her true mission, so widely
opposed to that of the war canoes of King Mtesa and
the slave-boats of the Arabs. In the Eleanor, or
Mirembe, Mackay returned to Uganda; and by April I,
1884, he had accomplished four voyages for necessary
purposes in this useful little vessel.

It was but four days before Christmas when he
reached the Mission premises. ‘ That,’ writes Mr. Ashe,
‘was a time of great rejoicing. A goodly band of
candidates were awaiting baptism, and Mackay was
back again with the beautiful boat, and a supply of
stores, and best of all, our letters from England, and
good news of Gordon and Wise from the south of the
lake. There did not seem to be a single cloud in our
sky, and the recollection of that Christmas Eve is
among the brightest I can recall.’

-The scene, however, soon darkened. Idle accusations
were brought against the missionaries, and they found
themselves under a cloud of suspicion. But still darker
shadows were approaching. In spite of many ups and
downs of favour, King Mtesa had been, on the whole,
friendly to the work. But he had long been in a
suffering condition, and at length, in October 1884,
he succumbed to his disease, and throughout the
country passed from lip to lip the news that the great
monarch was dead. His loss could not but sadden the
missionaries, who had time after time pleaded with him
to accept in his heart and life the truth he knew so
well with his head. Very touching is the record of
Mackay’s appeal to him shortly after the death of
Namasole. The queen-mother had had a most costly
funeral, cloth after cloth and linen in enormous quantity
having been thrown into her grave, till the value had

 

 

s E»
., LAM”

\Kmuxwx 9&3.

 

2E $32:on Om, 22”me aozn.
:1sz L 33% N? h\.,...\E\u thmxwmx...

 

THE BEGINNING OF PE ESE C U T I ON. 99

reached about ,6 15,000! In conversing with Mtesa on
this matter Mackay took occasion to assure him how
little such pomp was worth. ‘ Let me,’ said he, ‘have
only an old bark cloth, and nothing more of this world's
riches, and I would not exchange for all the wealth and
greatness of both (the two head chiefs), because all
their greatness will pass away, while their souls are
lost in the darkness of belief in the lubare; while I
know that my soul is saved by Jesus Christ the Son of
God, so that I have riches that never perish.’ Mtesa
replied with his usual excuses about the ‘two religions ’
put before him (the Mohammedan and the Christian).

Mackay writes: ‘I left my seat, and going forward
to the mat on which the A’alz'lez'ro was sitting, I knelt on
it, and in the most solemn manner I said, “O Mtesa,
my friend, do not always repeat that excuse. When
you and I stand before God at the great day_of judg-
ment, will you reply to Almighty God that you did not
know what to believe, because Masudi told you one
thing and Mackay told you another? No; you have
the New Testament; read there for yourself. God
will judge you by that. There never was any one yet
who looked for the truth there and did not find it.” ’

But this earnest appeal was, like many others, in
vain. With all his enlightenment, knowledge, quick-
ness of thought and perception, and the evident power
which the \Nord had sometimes exercised over him,
Mtesa died a heathen.

This sad event was the means of making manifest
the wonderful influence exercised by the Gospel, even
over those whose hearts are not yielded to it. A
standard of right and wrong had been set up in Uganda,
and even the heathen unconsciously owned it. In
former times the death of the sovereign had been the
signal for wholesale and indiscriminate murder, tumults,

100 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

and robbery. This time it was very different. There
was indeed much cause for apprehension. The news
was brought to the missionaries by a friend, who
whispered it at midnight under Mr. O’Flaherty’s
window, bidding them prepare for what might happen.
The Arabs armed themselves to the teeth, and every
one looked with suspicion on his neighbour. Two of
the most powerful chiefs proposed attacking the Mission
premises, but the leatz’lez'ro prevented them, and gave
orders that there was to be no pillaging. ‘That night,’
writes Mr. Ashe, ‘we heard the quick beat of drums,
sudden and alarming, and the sound of a great cry
swept fitfully and wildly across the intervening valleys,
as ever and anon a gust of wind stronger than usual
brought it to our ears.’ In the morning Mr. O’Flaherty
and Mr. Ashe went up to the palace to offer their con-
dolence, and present a piece of fine calico for the
funeral. They found it filled with a wailing crowd,
the chiefs dressed in dirty bark cloth, and weeping
piteously.

Mackay was at the port on the lake, where he had
had the Eleanor drawn up on the beach when the
news reached him. He immediately set to work to
launch her again, feeling that in case of trouble being
at hand she might prove a place of refuge. The next
day he returned to Natete (the Mission station), and
was quickly sent for by the chiefs, to direct the native
workmen in making the coffin. The whole country
now went into mourning. No white or coloured clothes
were seen, and the men put on girdles of withered
plantain fibre, the women of leaves.

Mtesa’s youngest son, Mwanga, a lad only eighteen
years of age, was the one chosen to succeed him. He
had often visited the missionaries, and had learned a
little from them, but he is described as wayward and

 

 

THE INTERIOR or m‘rESA’s TOMB.
(From a Mela/z 12y Bis/zap Tue/oer.)

 

THE BEGINNING OF PERSECUTION. 103

flighty, and unable to concentrate his attention on one
thing for any length of time, and, in fact, inferior every
way to his father, though bearing a likeness to him
in outward appearance. His brothers were spared the
usual fate of princes on such occasions, and allowed
to live, and the kali/ezro, contrary to custom, managed
to retain office. The king changed the royal residence
from Rubaga to Nabulagala.

Mwanga treated the missionaries with but scant
courtesy. Shortly after his accession to the throne he
requested Mackay to go to the south of the lake, and
bring more white men, ‘as if those beings were to be
had for the mere ordering of them.’ Mackay, however,
really hoped to find a reinforcement at Msalala, and,
in anticipation of this, had planned to return to England
in the spring. Mr. Roscoe and Mr. Yeames had, in
fact, started originally for the lake. But the former
remained at Mamboia, and the latter was sent to Frere
Town, and, to Mackay’s disappointment, there was
nothing for Uganda but a cargo of goods. The voyage,
in spite of this, seems to have been a time of real
refreshment. It was necessary that a king’s messenger,
or headman, should accompany the boat, and after
some attempt to force upon Mackay a man who was no
friend to the Mission, the king had at length appointed
one of his pages, named Mika Sematimba, a baptized
Christian, to the post. Some other Christian lads went
with them, and Mackay writes :—

‘I had as many as nine Christians on board—a rare
pleasure. In mid—lake in the midnight hours, as they
sang their hymns, and joined me in prayers, I could
only reflect how much sooner than I had expected
a year before the small Eleanor had become in some
more true way a missionary vessel.’

This little time on board the Mirembe must have

104 iHE STORY OF UGANDA.

been as an oasis in the desert of toil and trial passed
through by Mackay. Shut out from the sights and
sounds of cruelty, from the clamour of tongues, from
heathen suspicion and rage, with only the waters round
him, and the open heaven above, his little Christian
crew about him, he could gather fresh strength for the
conflict, shortly to wax hotter and fiercer than ever.
On his return to Uganda, Mwanga, being disappointed
of the white men for whom he had sent, immediately
resolved to supply their place by others, and sent to
Ukumbi for some French priests.

Various other causes conspired to increase his ill-
will towards the missionaries. The journey of Mr.
Joseph Thomson through Masai Land had given rise
to the report that there were white men in Busoga,
a tributary state to the east of Uganda, and separated
from it by the Nile. The king not unnaturally con—
cluded that these were the men whom Mackay ought
to have brought from the south end of the lake, and
that they had taken another route. The Baganda
had a great jealousy of any strangers coming to their
country by way of Busoga, partly because they con-
sidered the approach easier than that by way of the
lake, which formed a kind of natural defence to their
country, and partly because of an old prophecy that
Uganda was to be conquered by a people coming from
the east. Once, when the easterly route was mentioned
by Maekay to King Mtesa, he said, ‘I know you white
men want exceedingly to see what there is beyond
Busoga, but Iwill never permit it.’ Just at this time
the king of half Busoga failed to come as usual with
his yearly tribute of ivory. This failure was at once
attributed to the presence of white men in his country,
who had incited him to rebel.

The Arabs now got up a report that the missionaries

i‘HE BEGINNING OF PERSECU'I‘YON. 105

were harbouring malefactors, a man who was arrested
for some offence having been found hiding with one
of the Christian converts. The anger of the king
being aroused by this, the flame was fanned by Mujasi,
captain of the body-guard, who was friendly with the
Arabs, and had a deep—seated hatred of white men and
their religion. The missionaries soon heard that Mujasi
had orders to arrest all Baganda found on their
premises. They at once warned the people not to
visit them, and sent away some lads who had come
from a distant part of the country for instruction.
Some of these, however, came back in a day or two,
thinking that there was in reality no danger.

In January 1885 Mr. Mackay asked leave of the
king to cross the lake, wishing to take some letters
to Msalala. Permission was granted, and he returned
home and made preparations to leave the next day.
‘Towards midnight,’ he writes, ‘there was a great
deal of drumming, but that is so common a thing
that we never heeded it. It was only too late that
we knew it was Mujasi collecting an army to entrap
me next morning.’ Next day the party set out,
Mackay’s wangwaiza (coastmen) carrying the loads,
and several boys who had attached themselves to the
missionaries going along with them. Mackay and
Ashe, who was to accompany him as far as the port,
Ntebe, followed together. Every now and then they
met little companies of armed men, but their suspicions
were not aroused until, having nearly reached the lake,
there sprang upon them from the bush several hundred
men armed with guns, spears, and shields, shouting,
‘Go back ! go back !’ They were jostled, and pushed,
and forced to turn their faces the way they came, guns
also being pointed at them. They walked quietly back,
and hoped their boys had reached the port without

106 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

molestation. But it was not so. After marching some
distance, Mr. Ashe perceived his boy Lugalama being
led along handcuffed. Hastening forward to undo the
cords, he was driven back by the mob; but by—and-by,
when the boys had disappeared, the missionaries were
left to finish their march alone. They hastened at once
to the kalz'lcz'ro, but could obtain no redress, and were
at length violently turned out of the house and sur-
rounded by a clamouring mob, who, however, contrary
to all natural expectation, suddenly dispersed and
allowed them to return to their dwelling unmolested.
Thus did the providence of God watch over them.
They immediately bade the lads who were staying with
them to take flight; but one, Seruwanga, lingered too
late, and was caught that evening by Mujasi’s men.
Mukassa Samweli (of whom more hereafter), and
Edward Mukassa (one of the first five baptized in
1882), both servants of Mwanga, ventured to the
Mission House to offer their sympathy, though unable
to help. Mr. O'Flaherty went to the king next morning,
but without effect. By—and—by, however, some of the
boys were set free, but Seruwanga Kakumba, who had
attached himself to the missionaries, and Lugalama,
were led away to be put to death. Lugalama was
a little Muhuma1 boy, said to belong to one of the
chief families of Karagwe, who had been captured
in a raid made by the Baganda. I-Iis captor, the chief
Sebwato, had treated him kindly, and on returning
home sent him to the missionaries, thus practically
setting him free. He now did his utmost to save
him, but in vain. Another chief actually accepted
a valuable present from Mr. Ashe on condition of
bringing back Lugalama, when he knew the boy was
no longer living.

‘ Mulnnna, singular of \Va‘numa.

THE BEGINNING OF PERSECUTIOzV. 107

The three lads—one aged about fifteen, the youngest
only eleven 01' twelve—were taken to the borders of a
dismal swamp. Here a sort of rough scaffold was
erected, and heaped with firewood. The crowd mocked
and taunted the prisoners. ‘ Oh, you know Isa Masiya’
(Jesus Christ), said Mujasi, ‘you know how to read.
You believe you will rise from the dead ? Well,I shall
burn you, and see if it be so.’ The lads are said to
have answered boldly and faithfully; and one report
related that they had raised their voices and sung the
praises of Christ in a hymn which had been translated
into Luganda: ‘Daily, daily, sing the praises’ (Ki/[a
Si/m tmzsiflt). This was afterwards contradicted. But
one wonders if an African could have invented it.

The persecutors were not satisfied merely with taking
the lives of these faithful lads. To death was added
torture. Their arms were savagely cut off, and bleeding
they were flung upon the scaffold. The youngest and
tenderest had pleaded to be only cast into the fire, but
the murderers would spare him none of the agony.
There stood by one of Mujasi’s men, his musah' or
guide, who related the sorrowful story afterwards. The
murderer turned fiercely upon him: ‘I will burn you
too and your household ; I know you are a follower of
lsa’ (Jesus). ‘Yes, I am,’ answered Kidza, ‘ and I am
not ashamed of it.’ But his time to suffer for Christ
was not yet come.

That night, January 31, Mr. Mackay wrote in his
diary : ‘ Our hearts breaking}

The fierce and cruel Mujasi now threatened to roast
any one who should venture to go near the mission-
aries. In spite of this order, young Samweli (Muliassa)
came to tell them he had been denounced to the king
as a Christian, but was not afraid to die. They, how—
ever, sent him away, bidding him not to expose himself

108 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

unnecessarily to danger. Sebwato, and the young
admiral, Gabunga, also visited them under cover of
the darkness. Samweli, who was one of the king’s
pages, also interceded for Sarah, the widow of Filipo
Mukassa, and now the Wife of Henry Wright Duta,
who was in the stocks for teaching some of the prin-
cesses, and whom, with her child, Mujasi had threatened
to burn. Sarah was released and sent to the mission-
aries; and at the same time the guard which had been
set to watch their dwelling was removed. Mujasi had
gone a little too far in accusing some of the chiefs, and
he was sent away from the capital, while the king tried
to make out that the murder of the three boys, as well
as the ill treatment received by the missionaries, was
purely his doing.

The death of the young martyrs was but the begin-
ning of the ‘great tribulation’ through which the
infant church of Uganda was to pass. But like a
precious ‘corn of wheat’ it was to bring forth abundant
fruit, not only in their own land, but among Christians
at home, in stirring up the hearts of many to fresh
enthusiasm and effort for the cause of Christ.

And many more are crowding round to hear the Gospel word,
And many more have pledged themselves to follow Christ the Lord ;
The path of suffring and of scorn those youthful feet have trod
Is turned into a fertile field, and beareth fruit to God.

S. G. S.

CHAPTER VIII.

THE [WAR TYR BISHOP.

‘For My Name’s sake.’——JOHN xv. 21. ‘For the elect’s sakes.’——
2 TIM. ii. 10.

N the removal of the guard which had been set

over the Mission premises numbers at once
flocked in to be taught, their eagerness in no way
abated by the terror of what had taken place, and some
of them were baptized. But all this was considered by
the old chiefs of the country, who clung to the lulmre
worship, as Icycju (insolence, or ‘cheek '). They began
to plan rebellion against Mwanga, one of their com—
plaints being that he was about to adopt the white
man’s religion (1), and alter the customs of the country.
They had formed a plot to murder him at a feast in
honour of the late king; but he, being informed by a
relative, kept away on the occasion. The danger to
the missionaries at this time was grave. Mr. Mackay
writes in his journal, February 24, 1885 :—

‘ If the rebels win we need expect little quarter, as
our presence is part of the ground of complaint, and
Mukwenda (one of the most powerful chiefs) it was who
wished to plunder us when Mtesa died. On that occa-
sion the kalz'kz'ro alone is said to have prevented any
one from touching us. The situation is most serious.
Mirambo dead,1 and Msalala—we know not what to

' They had just heard of the death of this great potentate, and feared
their brethren at Msalala, whom he had favoured, might be endangered
by the event.

' 109

IIO THE STORY OF UGANDA.

think may have happened to it. Our boat a wreck——
the only means of escape, should the rebels win. We
only hope that the king, by a sharp stroke, may be
able to save himself, and us with him. We com-
mend ourselves to God in prayer, and wait for the
morning.’

Next day the ‘sharp stroke’ was made, and the
rebellion was, in the providence of God, quashed in its
commencement. The chief Mukwenda was arrested
and put in the stocks, and his property plundered.
Seventeen other chiefs were deposed, and the king
and the leatz'kiro came out victorious. Several of the
adherents both of the missionaries and of the French
priests obtained good positions at court.

Mackay now begged permission to go to the port,
and endeavour to save the Eleanor, news having been
brought him that the boat was swamped. After some
days’ vexatious delay he obtained leave, and hastened
down to the port. On emerging from the forest he
‘could faintly discern among the white tops of the
waves something also white, causing the waves to
break higher.’ The vessel was still afloat, but lying
on her side, with only a few feet length of the port
side above water. Hiring some canoes from the
fishermen, he made for the wreck. One man dived
and got hold of the anchor-chain, and the anchor was
then got on board one of the canoes, and the vessel
being secured by stout ropes, they pulled for shore,
‘four canoes, two abreast, hauling tandem a shapeless
hulk through the water.’ Finally, with much difficulty
and danger, the wind having changed, so that they
nearly drifted on to the rocks, the boat was hauled on
shore with the assistance of the friendly natives, who
in their excitement jumped into the water, ‘regardless
of crocodiles,’ to help. Thus the Mission boat was

THE MARTY]? BISHOP. III

saved, to be a refuge to the missionaries in future time
of need.

Feeling the precariousness of their position, and the
uncertainty whether they would be able to remain in
the country, the missionaries felt it desirable to make
some arrangements for the carrying on of -the work, in
case they should be compelled to leave. Their first
care was to provide for some organisation in the native
Church. This was the origin of the Church Council,
which was formed 'of men chosen by the converts
themselves, the members being such as by their
standing and reputation might command the respect of
all. It was arranged that each convert should attach
himself to some centre, presided over by an elder, so
that in case of trouble there should be a rallying—point
where worship might be carried on and instruction
given. They further hastened to provide printed
matter for those who might at any time be left without
teachers. Copies of Morning and Evening Prayers,
and the Baptismal Service for adults, were printed,
together with Scripture texts, and some hymns in
Luganda. The Gospel of St. Matthew was in process
of translation, but this was far too important a work
to be hurried through. ‘ Every sheet,’ wrote Mackay,
‘has to go through the hands of our best pupils again
and again before they agree upon it.’

No danger, however, seemed to damp the zeal of the
crowd of inquirers after Christianity, or learners already
baptized. Writing in September Mr. Mackay says :—

‘ A great number, I may say almost all, of the pages
and storekeepers, etc., about the court are pupils, either
of ours or of the Papists. Again and again I have seen
the various store and other houses of the court literally
converted into reading—rooms. . . . Lads sitting in
groups, _or sprawling on the hay-covered floor, all

112 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

reading; some the book of Commandments and other
texts, some the Church prayers, and others the
Kiswahili New Testament. They are, besides, very
eager to learn to write, and at all times are scribbling
on boards, or any scrap of paper they can pick up. . . .
We make them pay for any paper or pens they want.
Nor do we give them books, large or small, for nothing.
The only things we give gratis are alphabets and many
pages of syllables. But that is more in the way of
advertisement. When they learn syllables they in-
variably buy a book. Our day-school is well attended.
. . . On Sunday the numbers that come far exceed
our space. But outside is large enough for all, and
when the inside of our chapel is filled with classes,
others find a shady corner here and there out of doors.’

Meanwhile Hannington, who since his return to
England in 1883 had ever kept his eye on East Africa,
had at length recovered his health sufficiently to allow
of his returning thither. The Church Missionary
Society Committee had long been anxious to secure
for their missionaries scattered over a wide area in
this part of the world episcopal counsel and super-
vision, and all things having been arranged with the
Archbishop of Canterbury, it was felt that no more
fitting man could be found than the dauntless hero
who had already conducted a missionary party as far
as the lake, and in whom no remembrance of sufferings
endured could keep down the ardent desire to return.
011 June 24, 1884, James Hannington was consecrated
in Lambeth Parish Church Bishop of Eastern Equatorial
Africa, and shortly afterwards he started for his diocese,
hoping later on to be followed by Mrs. Hannington
and his youngest child, who were to reside at Mombasa.
Lookers-on have wondered how this noble-hearted
servant of God could start on an enterprise of such

i

\ \\\\\

. \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

 

BISHOP lIAXXIXG’I'ON

 

THE MAE TYR BISHOP. 115

peril leaving a family behind him, and have even
censured him for the course he took, although they
would not blame the soldier who goes forth at his
country’s call, undeterred by the claims of home. ‘To
his own master he standeth or falleth,’ and he knew
that the Divine Master had called him. It was not
lightly that he tore himself away from his beloved ones.
\Vriting to Mr. Fitch, Vicar of Cromer, who was
parting with a son to accompany him, he says :—

‘I 'am sure you will be blessed, ay, greatly blessed,
in making the sacrifice. I am giving up three children
to go out, for they cannot go with us, and nobody can
tell how at times my heart bleeds. It is agony. But
I can do it for Christ's sake, and I believe that He
asks it of me.’

And from the vessel that bore him away he wrote
to his congregation at home, unburdening his full
heart in verse, almost too sacred to print. Could he
only once more clasp his dear ones, he says,

‘ I would surely never leave them,

\Vould never say good-bye.
* a: :14

But other thoughts came o’er me,
Thoughts of the weary slave,
Of the souls in heathen darkness

\Vliom Jesus came to save.

I knew that to me He whispered,
“Leave friends in My embrace,

And depart to tell these heathen
Of My death and saving grace."

9

All honour to her who was willing to let him go,
and whose was the heaviest share of the sacrifice, if
sacrifice it may be called.

After visiting the headquarters of the Mission over
which he had been set, at Frere Town, as well as Taita,
Chagga, and the Giriama country, he started on July
23, 1885, for Uganda. He had, not without much

116 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

consideration, decided, instead of taking the usual
route, to travel in a north-westerly direction from
Mombasa, and strike the lake on its north-eastern
shore, and reach Uganda by land. The traveller, Mr.
Joseph Thomson, who had penetrated by this route
nearly as far as Uganda, gave a favourable account of
the climate to be passed through, the chief danger to
be apprehended being from the wild tribes of the Masai
met with in some parts. Hannington’s main object in
taking this route was the desire to open up a shorter
road of communication with the missionaries in Uganda,
whose perilous position, so far out of the reach offriends,
lay very much on his heart. He was aware that in thus
choosing a new path he was running great risks, and
for this reason he resolved to take none of his own
countrymen with him, and was accompanied only by
Rev. William Jones, an African clergyman whom he
had lately ordained at Frere Town. But of one danger,
and that the worst, he was not aware, namely, Mwanga’s
jealousy of any white man approaching his country
from the east. Of this, the cause of his cruel murder
when on the very borders of the country, he was
entirely ignorant, and he had started before a warning
of it could reach him.

On the eve of setting forth he wrote to his wife:
‘I have been very much overdone, and was as near
as possible to a break—down yesterday; but to-day I
am revived, and am able to send an excellent account
of myself. I was delighted to think that you can trust
me in His hands, who has hitherto led me by the way.’

The bishop left Rabai with his caravan on July 23.
Passing the Taita country, he reached“ Kikumbuliu,
whence, an opportunity presenting itself of forwarding
despatches to the coast, he wrote his last letter, on
August II. ‘The burden of my song,’ he says, ‘must

THE [MARTY/C BISHOP. 117

be Praise, and the teaching of every lesson has been
Trust: so comfort your heart during my absence. . . .
I am quite aware that this is the easy part of the
journey, and that far greater difficulties from hango-
demanding natives are ahead, but if this is God’s time
for opening up this road, we shall open it up.

3.16 4k 9E * ’lk %

‘And now, just leave me in the hands of the Lord,
and let our watchword be, “We will trust, and not be
afraid.“

On August 20, the party reached Machako’s Hill,
where the British East Africa Company now have a
station. After crossing a grassy plain, they came to
the forest highlands of Kikuyu. Here they were in
terrible need of food. The Wakikuyu, having suffered
ill—treatment from the Swahili traders, fled before the
caravan, and all efi‘orts to reach them and win their
confidence seemed unsuccessful. Though the forest
was swarming with them, it was difficult to get sight
or speech of a single man. After the exercise of much
tact and patience the bishop and Mr. Jones succeeded
in buying food for their immediate wants, though not
without incurring considerable danger from the poisoned
arrows which these suspicious people, at the least
alarm, would let fly. It was not till a month later,
when Within sight of Lake Naivasha, that they met
with the Masai. They were then quickly surrounded by
a crowd of the young warriors, known as El-Moran.
While the older Masai are fairly friendly and peaceable,
these warriors, who serve from about the age of seven-
teen to thirty, are the terror of the surrounding peoples.
They are great cattle—raiders, and they demand heavy
bongo from every caravan that passes. They poured
into the bishop’s camp, swarmed in every tent, enriched
themselves with considerable bongo, and never left

118 ' THE STORY OF UGANDA.

the trembling porters nor the weary bishop and his
companion until darkness set in. With early morning
the caravan was astir again, and soon left these trouble-
some and dangerous people behind.

Yet another three weeks, and they had reached the
summit of the last great range of hills, and ‘fair
Kavirondo,’ as the bishop calls it, was at their feet.
They halted at the village Kwa Sundu, and here the
bishop determined to leave Mr. Jones, with the greater
part of the caravan, and to go forward himself with
fifty men, hoping, when he reached Uganda, to send
back any of the brethren Who should need to return
home, by way of Kavirondo, with Mr. Jones. He set
out on October 12, in spite of an abscess in the foot,
and walked in the next week one hundred and seventy
miles. Reaching the confines of Usoga, he fell in with
a disorderly troop of Baganda warriors, who seemed
much excited at the sight of the white man. On the
20th he wrote: ‘Through the mercy of God—and
every step of the way is through His mercy—nothing
happened during the night ; but I fear we have arrived
in a troublesome country.’

The very next day, having climbed a hill, whence to
his joy he saw the Nile ‘about half an hour's distance,’
he was suddenly seized by some men who had followed
him, dragged with extreme violence to a hut, and
thrust inside the court that surrounded it. Here he
was kept a close prisoner while Lubwa, the chief of the
place, who was tributary to Mwanga, sent to the king
to ask what was to be done with him.

In the meantime, the news of his having started for
Kavirondo had reached the missionaries in Uganda,
and caused them considerable uneasiness. They
requested leave from the king to send the boat to
Kavirondo, to meet him and bring him on. That he

THE [WA/CTYIL’ )‘ISHOI’. 119

was going on to Busoga they had no idea. But the
suspicions of Mwanga had been aroused by tidings
of the advance of the Germans upon Zanzibar. The
Arabs had, ever since the coming of the white men,
maintained that it was the design of the foreigner to
‘eat up the country. Mtesa had answered these
warnings by saying: ‘Let the Bazungu alone. If
they mean to eat the country, surely they will not
begin at the interior. When I see them begin to eat
the coast, then I shall believe your words to be true.’
The Bazungu had now begun at the coast, and it was
not to be supposed that Mwanga would distinguish
between the English and the Germans. The chiefs
declared that the white men were all one, and that the
missionaries were only waiting for the headmen to
come, when they would begin to ‘eat’ the country.
Said one, ‘When you see running water, you may
expect more to follow.’ Another referred to the idea
entertained by some, that if white men were killed the
country would be ruined. No such result, he said,
had followed the murder of the two white men in
L'kerewe. And the general opinion was that the
bishop must not be allowed to penetrate into their
country through the ‘back door ’ of Busoga.

Mackay brought forward a map of Europe, and
endeavoured to make the king understand that the
Germans and the English were distinct nations. He
assured him that the chief they were expecting was a
man of peace, seeking only the good of the country.
It was all to no purpose. The king at length decided
to send a boat with a messenger to Kavirondo to find
the (Is/sofa (bishop), and convey him, not to Uganda,
but to Msalala, until the matter had been further
considered. But before the boat could reach Kavirondo
the bishop was advancing into Busoga.

120 YHE STORY OF UGANDA.

On October 25 a page of Mwanga’s came early and
reported to the missionaries that two white men1 had
arrived in Busoga ; and later on another informed them
that the white men had been put in the stocks. One
of these, they felt sure, was the bishop. It was
Sunday, and the building which served as a church
was now full of people, reading in classes before the
service. After conference and prayer with the Church
elders, the missionaries started for the palace, some
three miles off. As they entered the enclosure a lad
whispered to them that messengers had already been
sent to kill the white men. The king refused to see
them. That night they were ‘too anxious to sleep,’
and were up long before dawn the next day. Again
they tried to see the king, and got a note sent in to
him. He sent for Pere Lourdel, of the Romanist
Mission, to read it to him, and the latter begged him
not to bring trouble on his country by killing white
men, but rather to send them back again. The same
evening Mackay went up again, but could not get an
interview. Three more days were passed in terrible
anxiety and suspense, the king dissembling as to his
intentions, and informing Lourdel that the bishop was
to be sent back unhurt.

All this while Hannington was kept a prisoner, at
first in a close hut without ventilation, afterwards in
his own tent, which was placed within the enclosure.
Here he wrote the touching entries in his diary, so
wonderfully preserved in the providence of God, to tell
the tale of the martyr’s sufferings and faith unto the
end. Racked with pain, stricken down with fever,
guarded closely by soldiers, he still looked forward to
release, and ultimate arrival in the country he had
come so far to visit. His own cook was ,allowed to

1 The bishop’s cook, Pinto, was taken for a white man.

THE MARTYR BISHOP. 121

prepare his food, and his men were allowed to bring
it him by turns. He had written a note to Mackay,
which he expected would be delivered by Lubwa’s
messengers, but it is needless to say it never reached
its destination.

On October 28 he wrote in his journal: ‘(Seventh
day’s prison.) A terrible night, first with noisy,
drunken guard, and secondly with vermin, which have
found out my tent, and swarm. I don’t think I got
one hour’s sound sleep, and woke with fever fast
developing. O Lord, do have mercy upon me, and
release me! I am quite broken down, and brought
low. Comforted by reading Psalm xxvii.

‘In an hour or two fever developed rapidly. My
tent was so stuffy that Iwas obliged to go inside the
filthy hut, and soon was delirious.

‘Evening; fever passed away. Word came that
Mwanga had sent three soldiers, but what news they
bring they will not yet let me know.

‘Much comforted by Psalm xxviii.’

And on October 29, the day, as it appears, of his
murder, we find the following entry :—

‘Thursday_(Eighth day's prison). I can hear no
news, but was held up by Psalm xxx., which came
with great power. A hyena howled near me last night,
smelling a sick man, but I hope it is not to have me
yet.’

That morning the bishop’s men, who had hitherto
been allowed a certain measure of freedom, were taken,
and tied two and two together. Mwanga’s orders had
arrived to put the whole party to death. When _at
length Hannington was led forth a terrible pang must
have shot through his tender heart as he saw his
men bound, ready to be slaughtered. But another few
moments, and all sorrow was for ever to be left behind

122 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

His last reported words, truly characteristic of his life,
were a message to King Mwanga, saying he was about
to die for the Baganda, and that he had purchased the
road to Uganda with his life. Then he knelt down,
and as the signal gun was fired the spears flashed, and
the cruel work was done. The noble missionary had
breathed his last. His men lay (with a few excep-
tions) dead or dying around him. Once more the
servants of the King had been ‘spitefully entreated’
by those to whom they bore His message, and the
martyr’s blood was poured out for Africa.

And now for him who had, as far as a sinful mortal
may do so, laid down his life, as a faithful shepherd,
for the wandering sheep entrusted to his care, the
‘ crown of glory that fadeth not away,’ and, better still,
the immediate presence of the Master whom he loved,
and in whose footsteps he had sought to follow.

That day, October 29, Mackay wrote in his
journal :— .

‘No news all day. . . . A few of our people about;
They take a gloomy View of the situation, and do not
believe that the last messengers were sent to cancel the
order (for the white men’s death), but to confirm it.
The king pretended that he had forwarded a letter
from Mackay to the bishop, together with orders to
send him back. He kept up this dissimulation even
after the murder had been committed.

But the next day the news arrived. Mackay writes,
on October 30 :—

‘After dark Ismail came to tell us that messengers
had returned from Busoga with the tidings that the
white men had been killed, and all. their porters. . . .

‘ Oh night of sorrow I What an unheard-of deed of
blood 1’

Yet so contradictory were the reports, that for some

THE flIARTYIi‘ BISHOP. 123

days more hope alternated with fear. Not till Novem-
her 5 did the news seem confirmed with certainty, and
Mackay wrote :—

‘ We have no hope now for the bishop. The worst
seems over. Our dear brethren1 are happy. We
remain in the midst of death. Lord, Thy will be
done ! ’

And so the long-tried missionaries, who had looked
forward to welcoming helpers and friends in the work,
were left to face the threatening storm alone.

But we must go back to Mr. Jones, left with his band
of one hundred and fifty men at Kwa Sundu. Day after
day he waited, with increasing anxiety, for news from
his chief. At length, nearly a month after the parting,
four of the survivors arrived with the terrible news.
As they could not give a satisfactory account of how
they managed to escape, Mr. Jones refused to believe
their report, and suspected them of having deserted
from their leader. Another month he waited at Kwa
Sundu; but at length, finding the sad news confirmed,
he sorrowfully turned with his caravan once more
towards the coast. On February 4 the party limped
into Rabai, worn, weary, ragged, in their van the
lez'longosz', or guide, bearing a blue flag (the African
colour of mourning), with the word ‘Ichabod’ in white
letters upon it; in their rear the ‘battered white
helmet’ of the sorrowing leader.

In the safe arrival of the diminished caravan, whose
return journey had been made in sorrow and want, and
who had had to encounter the dangers and privations
ofthe way without the presence which had so encouraged
and animated them when they went forth, we may
trace the answer to the prayers of Hannington for his
‘ poor men.’ They had been much on his heart when

' Supposing there were two white men.

124 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

starting, and he had rested himself on the promise
which came to him as a direct message of God con-
cerning them : ‘ The Lord preserveth the strangers.’

It was on January I, 1886, that the first rumour
of the sad event reached England. On Sunday even—
ing, February 7, came the telegram from Frere Town
confirming it, which called forth a burst of mourning
from all the friends of Missions. But greater perhaps
than this was the universal interest and sympathy
which the recital of the martyr bishop's sufferings and
death called forth. By his life he had spoken loudly.
By his death a hundredfold had been added to his
testimony—a testimony to that constraining love and
sustaining grace which enables a man gladly and
patiently to lay down his all at the call, and for the
sake of his Heavenly Master.

‘Soldier, rise—the war is done;
Lo, the hosts of hell are flying;
’Twas thy Lord the battle won;
Jesus vanquished them by (lying:
Pass the stream—before thee lies
All the conquered land of glory;
Ilark what songs of rapture rise,

These proclaim the Victor's story‘—
Soldier, lay thy weapons down,
Quit the sword and take the crown;

Triumph ! all thy foes are banished,
Death is slain, and earth has \‘anished.’
Anon.

CHAPTER IX.

THE GREAT PERSECUTION.

‘ A burning fiery furnace.’—DAN. iii. 6.

HE year 1885 closed for the missionaries in

Uganda, as it had begun, in clouds and darkness,
interspersed with gleams of brightness from the heaven
beyond. The murder of their bishop meant something
more than deep sorrow for them. It meant continued
loneliness and isolation, and graver danger than ever.
The prestige which seemed to surround the person of
a white man had been broken through. One such,
and that one a chief, had fallen at the tyrant’s command.
What was there to prevent his taking the lives of the
others ? At the same time Mwanga was conscious that
he had committed a deed likely to rouse the anger of
the bishop’s countrymen, and his fears lest vengeance
should reach him rendered him even more hard and
cruel. Again, he was enraged at the white men getting
information about the things he wished to hide from
them. It was the case of Benhadad, king of Syria,
over again : ‘Will ye not show me which of us is for
the king of Israel?’1 ‘Mwanga complained,’ writes
Mackay, ‘that we know all his secrets from his own
pages.’ Certain it is that these lads knew the danger
they incurred in bringing news to the mission house,

1 2 Kings vi. II.
125

126 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

and yet did not shrink from it. ‘The devotion and
courage of these young Christians,’ writes Mackay,
‘are wonderful.’

Various warnings reached the missionaries of the
king’s feelings towards them. One of the princesses
sent word that if ever they needed to propitiate
Mwanga it was now, since when he killed any one, the
friends of the dead man were regarded as enemies,
unless they made the king a present to show that this
was not the case. A present was accordingly sent,
both to him and to the Icatz'lcz'ro. It appeared, however,
to produce at first a contrary effect to the one intended,
the king being angry that they should be sufficiently
informed as to the situation to think it necessary to
propitiate him. The next day came a peremptory
command for Mackay to go to the palace. IIe knelt
with Mr. Ashe to pray before facing the tyrant. ‘Very
humble,’ writes Mr. Ashe, ‘ very weak, very childlike he
was on his knees before God ; very bold, very strong,
very manly afterwards, as he bore for nearly three
hours the browbeating and bullying of Mwanga and
his chiefs.’ The king set himself, first by threats and
then by cajolings, to find out who had told them about
the bishop’s murder—if they would only reveal this they
should be great favourites. Their silence incensed
him greatly, and he cried, ‘What ifI kill you ? What
could Queeni (the Queen) do? What could she or
all. Europe do?’ Pere Lourdel, who was present,
attempting to put in a word, was at once extinguished
with, ‘lfI killed them, should I’spare you ?’ After
more abuse Mwanga suddenly called to an attendant
saying, "l‘ake these men, and give them two cows to
quiet their minds’ (l), and the court was dismissed.
Thus were they again, in the good providence of God,
saved from the mouth of the lion.

THE GREAT PERSECUTIOA’. I27

Orders were, however, issued forbidding any one to
go near their premises, on pain of arrest and death to
themselves. In spite of this, a message was brought
them at midnight from the young admiral, Gabunga,
who for some time had read with the missionaries and
attended their services, asking for baptism. ‘So it is,
and will ever be,’ writes Mackay : ‘ some will press into
the kingdom in times of the greatest trial.’

Now appeared the wisdom of having appointed
Church ‘elders,’ who could assemble at their own
houses a few Christians and others desirous of being
taught, with less danger than if they had attempted to
visit the missionaries. Gabunga and five others were
baptized, after proper examination, at the house of the
blacksmith before mentioned, Walukaga Nua. The
house of this man, Mr. Ashe writes, was ‘quite a
sanctuary in times of trouble: Sembera Mackay and
others also collected around them little congregations
for reading and prayer.

It was at this juncture, when, humanly speaking
everything around looked dark and black, that the first
sheet of St. Matthew’s Gospel in Luganda made its
appearance, three hundred and fifty copies being printed
off on November 13, 1885. Only two days later
another martyrdom took place. Balikudembe Mukasa,
the king's head page, had been for some time a reader
with the missionaries. Then the Romish priests got
hold of him, and persuaded him to join them. He
continued, however, a friend to his first teachers, and
showed sympathy with them in the time of trial.
Balikudembe dared to tell his royal master that it was
urong to have put Bishop Hannington to death, as
white men were the benefactors of the country. ‘ See,’
said the king, ‘this fellow wants to insult me.’ He
was sentenced to be burnt alive, and the [milk/1’0 gave

128 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

orders for this to be done at once, before the king had
time to change his mind (as he afterwards did). The
executioner, who was a friend of the brave lad, killed
him before committing his body to the flames. It
appears that Balikudembe had often spoken to the
king, and had exhorted him to put away his charms.
‘ Brave lad,’ writes Mackay, ‘thou hast witnessed
faithfully for thy Master here below. Enter into the
joy of thy Lord.’ Other Christians were also arrested,
one of them the sub-chief Sebwato (Nikodemo), besides
several pages who had gone to see Balikudembe after
his arrest.

These were afterwards set free, and a short time of
comparative peace followed. Mackay and Ashe con-
tinued to work hard at printing, getting assistance in
translation from their converts. The former writes, on
December 8 :—

‘The whole of the Sermon 'on the Mount is now in
type. Every proof sheet we distribute several copies
of among our people, and have their corrections and
emendations before going to press. They take a deep
interest in the work in this way, and are proud to have
[hair own Gospel.’

Later on, many of the bishop’s effects having been
brought from Busoga by Mwanga’s agents, a diary of
his journey from the coast to Kwa Sundu was given to
the missionaries by a Christian lad, who purchased it
of the king’s gatekeeper.

By the close of the year Mr. O’Flaherty had obtained
permission to leave, and Mackay and Ashe were left
alone. The former died on his way home, in the Red
Sea.

In February 1886 Mwanga’s palace was burned to
the ground, the fire originating in his gunpowder store.
He fled in the greatest terror, and made a temporary

THE GREAT PERSECUTION. 129

capital for himself on the creek. After this, Mr. Ashe
writes, ‘ Mwanga was gradually becoming disagreeable
again. He had said after the fire that the white men
had bewitched him, and would be the death of him
some day.’ He ordered Mackay to bring his boat to
a certain spot on the shore, and then instructed the
executioner to take men and go to meet him, and to cut
off his head. Mackay was, however, warned in time,
and kept away from the place.

A darker time now drew on. On Easter Sunday,
1886, there was a report that the Christians were to
be seized. This prevented their assembling together
in any large numbers; nevertheless, twenty—five people
altogether partook of the Lord’s Supper that day, some
of them for the last time.

In May the king’s anger was aroused by one of the
princesses flinging away her charms and burning her
ancestral relics. It was still further excited by the
refusal of one of his pages, baptized by the name of
Matia, to commit a shameful sin. The boy was severely
beaten, and put in the stocks, and the king began to let
loose his fury against the Christian ‘readers.’ T we
other boys were called into his presence. Mwanga
attacked one of them with his spear, and then sent
him to execution. Turning to the other, Kagwa
Apollo, he cried, ‘Are you a reader ?’ The lad
replied in the affirmative. ‘Then,’ shouted the king,
‘I’ll teach you to read,’ and seizing his spear he
broke the handle on the boy's back, and gashed him
about the head with the blade, only ceasing when
passion had exhausted him. Wonderful to say, the
boy recovered.

This savagery was but the beginning of a frightful
outbreak of persecution. The following morning Mr.
Ashe was sitting in the verandah behind the mission

9

I30 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

house, surrounded by his 'pupils. They had just been
singing a hymn :— '

‘All the people bow before Thee,
Thou, the Ruler of the heavens,’

when Mr. Mackay entered, with the news that the
king had given orders to seize all Christians. Quickly
the pupils were hurried away through a hole in the
back fence, just in time to escape the king’s officer,
who came to search for them. Mwanga now let loose
his fury against all who were either known or suspected
to be ‘readers.’ Chiefs were bidden to give up any
of their people who answered to this description.
Everywhere the officers were busy. The picture given
in Heb. xi. of sufferers for the faith seems prophetic
of what happened so long after in a country so long
unheard of. They ‘were tortured, not accepting deliver-
ance, that they might obtain a better resurrection.
They were . . . slain with the sword; they wandered
about in sheepskins and goatskins, being destitute,
afflicted, tormented (of whom the world was not
worthy); they wandered in deserts and in mountains,
and in dens and caves of the earth.’

Some of the Christians refused to flee into hiding,
lest they might give their enemies any ground for the
oft-repeated accusation of them as disloyal and seditious.
One of these was Walukaga Nua, the blacksmith.
While his wife escaped he quietly awaited the execu-
tioners, made no resistance when seized, and While in
captivity appealed to his jailers to embrace the service
of the Master for whom he was ready to suffer.

Another was Munyaga Roberto, the man who had
recovered Bishop Hannington’s Bible, and who had
insisted on himself paying part of the price for it.
He was engaged in prayer with some boys when the

THE GREAT PERSECUTION. I31

executioners arrived at his house. Springing up, all
but one of these made their escape through the reed
wall. Munyaga remained quiet. There was a gun
leaning against his door, and seeing this the execu-
tioners paused. But the noble martyr bade them fear
nothing, as he did not intend to use the gun, and only
requested leave to put on his kansu (White robe)
before they led him away. Yet another, Alexandre,
went boldly up to the court, and there confessed
himself a Christian.

Of what was passing the missionaries had no certain
news. They only heard rumours of horrible tortures
and death suffered by their converts. There came also
a report that the Mission premises were to be sacked.
Eight little boys residing with them were at once sent
away for safety. ‘We most earnestly ask,’ writes
Mackay, ‘that in case of our deaths these boys may
be sought out and recovered.’ They then asked the
French priests to join with them in taking steps to
try and procure the release of the Christians who were
in durance. The request was refused; the French-
men fearing that such combined action might exas—
perate the king yet further. On May 29 Mr. Mackay
went himself to see Mwanga at his temporary palace
by the lake. He reminded the latter of a promise
made to him that he should have whatever he might
wish for in payment of some work done for the king.
‘ What do you want?’ asked Mwanga. ‘I want,’ said
Mackay, ‘the lives of the people you have seized.’
The king promised to grant his request; but he had
no intention of keeping his word. Some had actually
already perished. A few days later the rest were
brought out for death. The scaffold Was ready, the
flames were kindled around them, and thirty-two brave,
devoted martyr spirits, having witnessed faithfully for

132 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

their Master here below, went up to hear His ‘Well
done !’ and enjoy His immediate presence.

Among those who perished were the men already
mentioned. Munyaga was said to have been put to
death with exceptional cruelty, one limb after another
being cut off and flung into the fire before the final
committal to the flames. Another was Kidza, or Fredi
Wigram, who as nmsalz' (guide) to the persecutor
Mujasi had witnessed the death of the first three boy-
martyrs, and had on that occasion boldly confessed
himself to be a Christian. His master, Mujasi, had
actually warned him to flee, being probably unwilling
to lose a faithful and useful servant, but Kidza refused
to do so. Mr. Ashe speaks of him as ‘gentle, loving,
and brave, one of God’s noblest martyrs,’ and says:
‘When I visited the scene of our children’s murder
it was he who led me to the place. When we reached
it he knelt with me and poured out his heart to God,
that He would bring His salvation to those in darkness.’
Truly that prayer was heard, though he and many
others had first to pass through torture and fire.
Walukaga, Munyaga, and Kidza were members of the
Church Council.

The demeanour of the martyrs made a great impres-
sion on the head executioner. He came and reported
to the king that he had never killed men who showed
such fortitude and endurance, and that they had prayed
aloud to God in the fire—prayed, no doubt, like the
Master of whose cup they drank—for their murderers,
and for their country. But Mwanga only replied, amid
the merriment of the court, that ‘God had not rescued
them from his power.‘

All these details were reported to the missionaries
by converts who had eluded the king’s officers, and
who sought their dwelling under cover of the night.

 

 

 

 

THE GREAT PERSECUTION. 135

One of their first visitors at this time of trial was
an old chief who had been deposed by the king, called
Isaya.1 Some of his own lads (retainers) were under
sentence of death, and after relating the death of the
martyrs, he burst into tears and a terrible wail : ‘ They
are going to kill my children! my children !’ But by
the merciful providence of God he was spared this
trial, and his people were left unmolested. Another
visitor was a little boy called Kiwobe, who had been
instructed by Munyaga Roberto. Nothing intimidated
by the shocking death of his teacher, he came to Mr.
Ashe with the request :—

‘ My friend, I wish to be baptized.’

‘ Do you know what you are asking? ’ was the reply.

‘I know, my friend.’

‘ But you know if you say you are a Christian they
will kill you.’

‘I know, my friend.’

‘But suppose people asked you if you were a reader,
could you tell a lie, and deny it, and say No ?’

‘I shall confess, my friend.’

He was baptized by the name of Samuel.

Two other visitors who brought news were anxious
to know if believers yet unbaptized (of whom some must
have perished) were sure of salvation. They were of
course told that where the omission of baptism did not
arise from disobedience to our Lord’s command, it was
well with them. To these two the missionaries gave
some papers and a printed letter to circulate among the
Christians in hiding. The letter was as follows :—

‘PEOPLE or JESUS WHO ARE IN BUGANDA.

‘OUR FRIENDs,——We, your friends and teachers,
write to you to send you words of cheer and comfort,

' See page 74.

 

136 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

which we have taken from the Epistle of Peter the
Apostle of Christ. In days of old Christians were
hated, were hunted, were driven out, and were per-
secuted for Jesus' sake; and thus it is to-day.

‘ Our beloved brethren, do not deny our Lord Jesus,
and He will not deny you on that great day when
He shall come with glory. Remember the words of
our Saviour, how He told His disciples not to fear
men, who are only able to kill the body; but He bid
them to fear God, who is able to destroy the body
together with the soul in the fire of Gehenna.

‘Do not cease to pray exceedingly, and to pray for
our brethren who are in affliction, and for those who
do not know God. May God give you His Spirit and
His blessing! May He deliver you out of all your
afflictions! May He give you entrance to eternal life
through Jesus Christ our Saviour!

‘Farewell We are the white men; we are your
brethren indeed who have written to you.

On the other side of the page was printed I Peter iv.
12—19.

‘What anguish of soul we have experienced,’ writes
Mr. Mackay, ‘no words can express. This dreadful
massacre has not, however, come unexpectedly. Ever
since the king came to the throne things have tended
that way. Again and again we have felt ourselves on
the verge of it.’ ‘But,’ writes Mr. Ashe, ‘terrible as
has been the slaughter, some of the very best of our
people having been burnt, yet so far we have the deepest
cause for thankfulness that a great house full of pages
who are our converts have up to the present been
spared. A similar house, containing the converts of
the French priests, was taken, and some thirty of the
boys were burned alive. The reason that our lads were
spared is that the head storekeeper, a powerful chief, .

THE GREAT PERSECUTIOZV. I37

interceded for them. They are most useful to the king,
which perhaps, too, has had some influence in saving
their lives.’

As night after night passed, and the rest of the
missionaries was broken in upon by some fresh visitor,
great was their joy when well-known faces turned up
which they had hardly expected to see again. Some
came for baptism, men, boys, and even women ; one of
these a princess named Nahuita. One young chief had
been a pupil of one of the martyrs named Dan.

In the hush of night, by the dim lamplight, the sacred
ordinance was administered, and the converts promised
‘ to confess Christ crucified, and manfully to fight under
His banner against sin, the world, and the devil, and to
continue His faithful soldiers and servants unto their
lives’ end.’

Henry Wright Duta and Samweli Mukassa were
under sentence of death as prominent friends of the
Mission. The former was in hiding, but the latter
was absent on the king’s business. Samweli was a
thoroughly upright, earnest Christian, and had taught
his mother and grandmother, so that they had thrown
away their charms, learned to read, and received bap-
tism. Though only eighteen years of age, he had been
elected a member of the Church Council by an almost
unanimous vote. One morning at 3 A.M. Samweli, with
two or three others, made his appearance. He was in
great perplexity, and had come to the missionaries to
help him. He had been commissioned by the king to
collect the tribute of cowrie shells in Busongora. On
his way back to the capital he heard of the persecution
which had broken out, and found that he himself was
to be put to death. His companions urged him to fly;
but there was the tribute he had collected—what was
he to do with that? If he failed to deliver it, the name

138 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

of a Christian might be coupled with that of a dis-
honest servant. ‘ Tell me what you think,’ said Mr.
Ashe. ‘ My friend,’ was the reply of Samweli, ‘I cannot
leave the things of the leaba/ea (king).’ They knelt
down together and prayed, and it was then arranged
that Samweli should start early with his carriers, so as
to leave the loads of shells with the storekeeper before
the executioners were abroad. It was uncertain whether
the men would agree to this haste, uncertain whether
the tribute-gatherer would have time to escape after
giving up his charge; but he did not hesitate. The
way to the storekeeper’s enclosure was taken: On
reaching the place, Samweli walked boldly in and
deposited his loads, came out again and walked coolly
on till out of sight, and then sped off with all possible
celerity, rejoicing the missionaries’ hearts by appearing
at their door a few nights later to report himself safe,
as well as to ask questions about the saints who came .
out of their graves after the resurrection, and of the
meaning of our Lord’s words about St. John (‘ If I will
that he tarry till I come,’ John xx. 22).

It was about this time, on June 19, that Mackay
obtained from the king’s storekeeper the last diary
of Bishop Hannington, which he afterwards sent to
England. We can imagine the two missionaries, in
the midst of their own trials, shedding tears over the
account of the martyr’s last days, spent so near to them,
while he was yet, alas ! beyond their reach.

While the persecution was at its height, Dr. Junker,
the Russian traveller, arrived at the mission house.
He had contrived to send a letter to Mr. Mackay, to
announce his desire to come to Uganda on his way
to the coast. He was then at Kabarega’s capital in
Bunyoro, and probably in some danger. Mr. Mackay
had exerted himself in his behalf, so that he was con-

THE GREAT PERSECUTIOZV. I39

ducted safely to Buganda. He brought afearful account
of what he had seen on reaching the country, the muti-
lated bodies of those slain in the persecution lying by
the wayside. Of these only a few were baptized
persons. The chiefs had all been ordered to give up
the ‘readers’ among their followers, and a wholesale
butchery had followed. Even on the road to the king‘s
enclosure Mr. Ashe had seen the ghastly sight of a
dissevered head and limbs lying on the pathway.
Through Mr. Mackay’s influence Dr. Junker, after a
brief stay, was allowed to leave Uganda in the Eleanor.

When he was well on his way, the missionaries
proceeded to ask leave of the king to quit the country,
which they had delayed doing, for fear of involving him
in their troubles. Their object in this demand was not
the desire to escape from the scene of trials, but the
persuasion that it was the strongest protest they could
make against the horrible cruelties committed. But
Mwanga was not anxious to lose them. His first
answer was a point—blank refusal, expressed in his
usual insulting manner. Mr. Mackay, however, returned
to the attack. Taking with him a present, he obtained
a further interview with Mwanga, and told him he
intended to go. ‘I will never consent to that,’ replied
Mwanga. Finally he agreed to Mr. Ashe’s departure ;
and on August 25, 1886, the latter took his leave, and
hastened home to England, to tell yet more vividly than
could be done by writings, the story of the sufferings,
faith, and endurance of the Buganda martyrs.

But the sad, yet joyful tale had already evoked the
profoundest sympathy, not only in England, but in
far-off Mission fields. The Christians of Tinnevelly
resolved to devote their Christmas oHertories to the
relief of their suffering brethren in Africa, and the sum
of £80 was collected and sent to England for the

I40 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

purpose, with a letter full of sympathy, signed by the
native pastor of Palamcotta. This brotherly offering
came in usefully for the succour of the exiled Christians
from time to time, especially after the revolution of
1888.

‘IIigh honour theirs to prove,
Still stands redemption’s sign,
Not lost the type of love,
Nor quenched the martyr line.’
REV. G. ENSOR (Ckaner, May 1878).

CHAPTER X.

FRESH LABOURERS AND FRESH SORROIVS.

‘ Always hearing about in the body the dying of the Lord Jesus. ’—
2 Con. iv. 10.

OR about another year Mr. Mackay continued

alone in Uganda, constant in work, and constant
in danger. In January 1887 he wrote to Mr. Ashe:
‘ For a couple of months after you left I was having a
regular houseful of strangers every evening. The tin
of petroleum arrived just in time, as by it I could make
a respectable light, and the library became a night-
school. Late, late, often very late, we wound up, and
I was often more than exhausted—reading, teaching,
drugging, etc. By day I got, off and on, some transla-
tion done.’

Then an order went out from the king, on account
of some robberies which had been committed, to arrest
all found on the roads after dark, so that those in
hiding could not venture near the mission house.
Others, however, came by day, and often remained
there all night until the morning.

On March 6 he wrote again: ‘By the grace of our
loving Lord I am still in the body. But were it not
for the overruling hand of God, I fear there would be
nothing to report but tears and groans, if there were
even one left to report at all. Since receiving the mail
—some six months’ letters all at once—I have had the

141

142 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

consciousness strongly forced upon me that our very
existence here is mightily due to the prayers of you
and all the children of God in Europe. We have had
a period of respite, but once more the enemy seems to
be let loose, and trouble is more than in the air. Less
than a month ago we had another scare on a Sunday
morning, and I had to dismiss our little congregation
suddenly. The king had given out that he intended
making another onslaught on the Christians ; but happily
he has been hitherto prevented from his bloodthirsty
design. One or two of those in hiding had ventured
to come to light, and nothing was done to them. Then
another one or two prisoners for the faith were liberated,
and intimation was made that all others in hiding might
return. One ventured. He had been a page, and was
at once sent by the king to the katz'lezko, but has been
no more seen.’

There was evidence that this boy had been secretly
murdered. Among the Christians who had all along
been left unmolested, owing to their usefulness to the
king, was Edward Hutchinson, one of the first five
baptized converts. He was one of the most powerful
of the sub—chiefs, and had built the king a new palace
when the former one was destroyed by fire. He was,
however, unpopular in the country, and was at length
shot by an enemy. Mika Sematimba, once a page,
now a sub—chief and officer in the king‘s body-guard,
was sent to cut canes for rebuilding the king’s fences.
On the way his boy, who carried a bundle of things
for him, was robbed. In the bundle were found some
books, among them the New Testament in Kiswahili.
Mika fled away, and executioners were sent after him
in all directions, but happily without result.

The fickle king took up Mohammedanism again for
a short time, and ordered all his pages to read the

FRESH LABOURERS AND FRESH SORROWS. I43

Koran. Many of them refusing, he complained that
they compelled him to be ever killing them, so that
people would call him a madman ! He more than once
announced his intention to ‘kill very many.’ However,
Namasole, the queen-mother, though a heathen, sent to
warn him against putting to death those who were the
chief strength of his country.

In spite of teaching, weaving, carpentering, printing,
etc., Mr. Mackay continued to press on with the work
of translation, and in March 1887 he had the whole of
St. Matthew’s Gospel in Luganda MS. Every page
had been criticised and revised by his most advanced
pupils, so as to make it as faithful a rendering of the
“70rd of God in the tongue of Uganda as was possible.
The edict for catching people on the roads at night
‘gradually became more and more a dead letter,’ and
pupils returned in numbers. In May he wrote: ‘Of
late we have been reading in the evenings several of
the most difficult epistles right through. To-night we
had the seventh, eighth, and ninth chapters of Romans,
with a good class. The argument they seem quite
to comprehend. Where is Thomson, with his feeble
scheme of Islam for Africa? or Reichard, with his
charge of extreme poverty of mental power in the
negro ?’

Meanwhile, in spite of loneliness, danger, and sadness,
which came over him at times, till he found himself
‘ shedding tears like a child,’ Mr. Mackay writes :—

‘ I am exceedingly thankful that O’Flaherty, Junker,
and Ashe have all been permitted to escape in peace,
and are safe from the clutches of this boy-tyrant. He
pretends that his reason for not allowing me to go
is his affection for me.’ But, writing of Mwanga, he
goes on: ‘Unless the Lord has mercy on him, he will
come to grief some day. He is at present exasperating

144 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

his chiefs and people by his high-handedness with
them.’ These words were prophetic. But the time
was near when the missionary was to bid adieu to the
man who feared, hated, valued, and tormented him.
On July 12 he writes :—

‘Since the last entry in my note-book I have had
a month of trouble and anxiety. The existence of the
Mission has been wavering in the balance, and is even
yet undecided. Our enemies (the Arabs) have tried
their very utmost to prevail.’ The object of the Arabs
was either to kill or to get rid of one who had, from
the beginning, been the firm opposer of their wicked
deeds, and the king lent but a too ready ear to them.
A letter which arrived for Mwanga from the English
Consul at Zanzibar was, as once on a former occasion,
mistranslated by the Arabs. They moreover endea-
voured to inflame the king's anger against Mackay,
by representing his object as a political one, and they
further dilated upon Stanley’s expedition in search of
Emin Pasha, and magnified the force he had with him.
After much disputing, and questioning, and badgering,
it was decided that Mackay should leave the country,
and that he should send on another English missionary
to take his place. This spoiled the plan of the Arabs,
who had hoped to plunder the station after his departure.

Carefully all stores were put away and locked up.
The Church Council was then summoned, and pro-
vision made for the relief of the Christians in distress
through flight or imprisonment. This was done by Mr.
Mackay selling a tusk ofivory, presented by Emin Pasha
to the Mission, in acknowledgment of his services, so
as to advance the money, charging it to the Tinnevelly
fund. Every copy of St. Matthew in Luganda, to the
number of one hundred and sixty, was bought up by
the converts, as well as all the syllable sheets recently

FRESH LABOURERS AND FRESH SORROl/VS. I45

printed, and night and day the mission house was
thronged with people regretting his departure.

The last plot of the Arab Suleiman, Mackay’s arch—
enemy, was to get himself appointed as muba/ea, or
messenger, to take him across the lake; but Mackay
being warned, requested Mwanga to appoint one of his
own people. Finally, on July 21, he locked up the
Mission premises, left the keys with the French priests,
and, worn with worry, work, and farewells, started for
the port, where he had to patch and repair the Eleanor
before starting on his voyage. He reached the south
end of the lake on August I.

Before proceeding further we must go back, and take
a hasty glance at the stations founded by the early
missionaries to the lake, and which might be classed
as belonging to the Victoria Nyanza Mission. These
were Uyui, in Unyamwezi, and Msalala. Uyui was
visited by Lieutenant Smith in 1876, and afterwards by
Mr. Mackay. It was first occupied by Mr. Copplestone
in 1879. When the latter's health forced him to return
to England, his place was taken by Messrs. Edmonds
and Blackburn, who went out with Hannington in
1882. But the former was soon obliged to follow
his predecessor home, being disabled by sunstroke.1
Progress at Uyui was slow, as, although the people
were friendly, they manifested no interest at all in
spiritual things. They would listen to Mr. Blackburn
as he told them the story of the cross, but never
even ask a question. Gradually, however, some were
led to attend the services, and boys were brought
under regular instruction. The first converts were
baptized on July 12, 1885, and consisted of an old and
faithful servant of the missionaries, called Saburi, and
six boys.

' llc afterwards went out to Japan, but died there in 1889.
IO

146 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

In May 1875 Mr. Douglas Hooper, of Trinity Hall
and Ridley Hall, Cambridge, who had been most
active in stirring up and fostering a missionary spirit
in that university, sailed for East Africa. He went at
his own charges, taking with him Mr. S. G. Burr, who
had been a gardener, and a member of the Men’s
Night School at Mildmay. They started for Uganda
by the old route ; but on reaching Mamboia, Mr. Burr,
who had been suffering from fever and dysentery,
became worse, and passed away on September 9, 1885,
making the seventh missionary who had laid down his
life for Uganda (Bishop Hannington was the eighth).
His last intelligible words were, ‘Peace, perfect peace,
and, ‘You know the commandment, “Do all to the
glory.”’

Mr. Hooper went on to Msalala, and was intending
to proceed to Uganda, when news arrived of Hanning-
ton’s murder, and the uncertain state of matters at
Mtesa’s capital, which made it unadvisable for any
fresh missionary to proceed there. In April 1886 he
removed to Uyui, and took Mr. Blackburn's place
when the latter was obliged to return home to recruit.
He did not meet with much encouragement, save
among the boys whom he had gathered about him, and
in the following year the station had to be given up.

Msalala, as before related, was first occupied by
Hannington and his party in 1883, when the Mission
stores were removed thither from Kagei. Here the
Rev. E. C. Gordon remained with Mr. Wise, while
Mr. Ashe went on to Uganda. He found the attitude
of the people very unlike that of which he had heard
in Uganda. ‘We have no eager seekers,’ he writes,
‘after knowledge, no thirst for book-lore, which can
be turned to the best advantage by teaching the thirsty
learners to read, and putting the Book of books into

 

 

 

 

BISHOP HENRY PERROTT PARKER-
(Wy farm/Him! {3/ JIMSrs. [fl/1'01! fr? Fry.)

FRESH LABOURERS AND FRESH SORROH’S. I49

their hands. Here we have a hunger and thirst, a real
demand for cloth. They say: “ We will work for cloth
at almost any price or rate you like to give.” The
people here are distinguished by a remarkable taste
for music.’ Mr. Gordon wrote that he quite enjoyed
their occasional musical performances. He endeavoured
to turn this taste to good account by teaching the boys
hymns in Kiswahili. But in February 1886 the village
nearest the Mission station was attacked by hostile
chiefs in the neighbourhood, and its chief, Chasama,
made prisoner. From that time the victors continued
to harass the Mission, demanding perpetual presents
in the most insolent manner. This eventually led to
the giving up of Msalala as a station.

The abandonment of Uyui and Msalala took place
during the brief episcopate of Bishop Parker. The
second Bishop of Eastern Equatorial Africa was a
graduate of Trinity College, Cambridge, and had filled
for six years the post of Corresponding Secretary of
the Church Missionary Society in Calcutta, first as
joint worker with Mr. Welland, then in a precarious
state of health, and after his death as sole Secretary.
In 1885 he was in England, and spoke at the Annual
Meeting of the Society; but towards the close of the
year he returned to India, to take up, at his own
earnest desire, direct evangelistic work among the
Gonds of the Central Provinces. It seemed to the
committee that no fitter man than the Rev. Henry
Perrott Parker could be found to carry on the work,
begun by Hannington, of superintending and caring
for the different missions and missionaries in East and
Central Africa. He was 10th to leave the people among
whom he had begun to labour, but on the promise
being made that another man should be sent in his
place he yielded to the request of the committee, and

150 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

returned to England. He took leave of the committee
at the Valedictory Dismissal in September 1886, and
was consecrated shortly after at St. James’s, Paddington.

‘Always bearing about in the body the dying of the
Lord Jesus, that the life also of Jesus might be made
manifest in our body,’ 1 was the text from which the
Rev. H. C. G. Moule preached on the occasion. ‘ In
the body, in our body; that is to say, in our action
and intercourse, in our experiences of doing and
suffering, in those countless contacts with our sur-
roundings which constitute the reality of common life,
life among men, and which are all affected through
the organs and faculties of the body. In the body,
—that is to say, in eyes that watch, in lips that speak,
in hands that work, whether on the tent-cloth or the
manuscript, in feet, that pace the city or the desert, in
brain used and worn by the vivid mind; in the body
given up for work, given up for suffering, along the
path of life and labour for the Lord,—in this we always
carry about His dying.’ What a true picture do the
words give of a missionary’s life, and how thoroughly
were they illustrated in the short career of him at
whose consecration they were spoken!

Bishop Parker started for his diocese on Novem—
ber 3. At Lamoo he met Mr. Ashe, then on his way to
England, and heard with concern of the state of Mr.
Mackay’s health and his need of assistance. A warm
reception awaited him at Frere Town, and before the
year closed he had visited Rabai and Kisulutini, and
the Giriama country, as well as Zanzibar. In the
beginning of 1887 he visited the Shimba country, Taita,
and Chagga, and in June he set off for the lake,
travelling across country from Rabai to Mamboia, and
thence by the old route, accompanied by Mr. Blackburn,

‘ 2 Cor. iv. 10.

FRESH LABOURERS AND FRESH SORROWS. 151

whose health was now restored. They reached Uyui
in September, and after consulting with Mr. Hooper
the bishop came to the conclusion that the station
must be abandoned. The example of the chief at
Msalala had been followed by the chief at Uyui.
Ilis covetousness was aroused by the fact of large
stores for the supply of other stations being deposited
here, and his demands for lzongo were constantly
increasing, while he once threatened to shoot Mr.
IIooper if they were not complied with. A more
friendly chief in the neighbourhood, Mtinginya, promised
to take care of any goods that might be deposited with
him, and accordingly, the bishop having started for the
lake, Mr. Ilooper began the packing and removing.
\Vhile this was going on the chief of Uyui arrived
himself with some of his men, in a great fury. After
some time, however, he calmed down in a wonderful
way, and left in a friendly manner. ‘ Ah, Saburi,’ said
Mr. Hooper to his faithful servant, ‘ we have seen the
working of God this afternoon.’ ‘ Truly, God is wonder—
f ul,’ replied the latter. And Mr. Hooper writes: ‘ Never
did I feel more conscious that all was of the Lord. . . .
He (the chief) came up very, very angry, and I did
not give in one iota. . . . The outcome was that he
withdrew all he said the day before about shooting
any wangwana (coastmen, porters), begging his ‘ very
dear friends’ to stay on. A few days later he gave
permission for all the goods to be removed, and Mr.
Hooper proceeded with them to Kwa Mtinginya, in
Usonga, the chief left behind expressing a hope that
he would soon return. At Kwa Mtinginya he found
Mr. Ashe, who after spending six months in England
had returned to the field, bringing with him his friend
the Rev. R. H. Walker; a lay missionary, Mr. D. Deekes,
had followed them there.

152 THE .970ch OF UGANDA.

In the meantime Msalala had also been abandoned.
On Mr. Mackay’s arrival there from Uganda, Mr.
Gordon had returned with Mwanga’s messenger, that
monarch having specially chosen him to fill Mackay’s
place, on account of his being a namesake of Gordon
Pasha, whose memory was revered even in countries
he had never visited. Not long after, the extortion and
insolence of the chiefs grew to such a pitch that Mr.
Mackay found it necessary to pack up and remove the
stores to Usambiro, a little further north. Hither came
the bishop and Mr. Blackburn, who were soon joined
by Messrs. Ashe, Walker, Hooper, and Deekes, so that
there were actually seven missionaries with their
bishop gathered together by the lake. A fair prospect
now seemed before them. But unexpected trial was
at hand.

Together with Mr. Blackburn, the bishop had made
an exploring journey to Speke Gulf, and had fixed on
Nasa, by the lake, as a Mission station. Returning to
Usambiro, he held, in December I887, a fortnight's
conference, partly devotional, partly practical, with the
missionaries there assembled. In the beginning of the
following year Nasa was occupied by Mr. Hooper and
Mr. Deekes.

On March 4 Mr. Blackburn was taken very ill.
‘We took it by turns,’ writes the bishop, ‘to sit with
him night and day, and gave him nourishment in small
quantities at a time, and used such remedies as we all
agreed upon to be most likely to benefit him. On
the morning of the 12th he appeared better, but at
night a sudden change came on, and he quickly fell
asleep.’ The bishop was much affected by his loss.
Mr. Blackburn was at that time the only missionary in
Unyamwezi who was familiar with the language. His
wife was just then preparing to start for Africa to join

FRESH LABOURERS AND FRESH SORROIVS. I53

him. His body was borne to the grave by his servant
and boy, with six other native Christians, and his was
the first burial in Usambiro. The second was quickly
to follow.

On Sunday, the 25th, the little party partook of the
Holy Communion together. They were expecting to
separate shortly, for Mr. Walker was to start for
Uganda, and the bishop was going to Nasa, to help
Mr. Hooper, who was having some trouble with the
chief. The bishop assisted that day in the Kiswahili
services for the porters, giving them an address through
an interpreter. In the night Mr. Mackay was roused
by hearing him call his servant, and going to him,
found that he had a sharp attack of ague. Next day
he was in a high fever and delirious. Mackay, Ashe, '
and Walker watched him by turn, but at 9.45 that
night, a fortnight after Blackburn’s death, he expired.
The last resting—place for the body in which he had so
truly borne about ‘the dying of the Lord Jesus’ was
made ready at once. ‘It was a very rough, stormy
night,’ writes Mr. Walker, ‘much thunder and rain,
still the men worked very hard and dug the grave.
Towards 4.30 the storm ceased, and in the calm we
conducted the funeral. When it was just over, as we
returned, the dawn was visible in a streak of crimson
and gold in the east,—assuring us that though the
west looked dark and as gloomy as our path, yet a
bright future was in store for us as the sun rises. The
bishop lies buried side by side with our friend Black-
burn; they had travelled many a mile together, and
now they rest together.’

Thus perished one who by the beauty of his cha—
racter, by his humility of mind, his gentleness of spirit,
his utter unselfishness, his calmness, and trustfulness,
as well as by his singular wisdom and ability for

154 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

organisation, had made himself beloved and respected
by every member of the Mission of which he was called
to be the head.

The telegram announcing the death of the bishop
and Mr. Blackburn reached home on the day of the
Church Missionary Society Annual Meeting. ‘We
meet,’ were the opening words of the Bishop of Sodor
and Man (Dr. Bardsley), at the evening meeting,
‘under the shadow of a great sorrow"; and Mr.
Wigram then read the telegram: ‘Blackburn dead, ill
ten days. Bishop Parker dead, ten days later; samc
sickness, ill one day.’ All hearts were at once bowed
with the shock of the sudden loss, and earnest were
the prayers that went up to God for the mourners and
for the Mission field thus bereaved. Mr. Lang in
‘speaking’ the Report said that the bishop was ‘one
in whom the Society felt they had just the right man
given to them by God for a most difficult, a most
delicate, and a most important work. The committee
trusted him so entirely that perhaps the lesson the
Lord would teach them was that they must not depend
upon even the holiest and wisest agents He gives, but
only and entirely upon Ilim.’

In the letter which arrived later on from Mr. Mackay
giving the details of the sad event, he says :~—

‘The loss to us is indeed very great, but East Africa
has lost its truest friend. We were all deeply attached
to our bishop, and could not fail to admire his rare
humility and deep earnestness and conscientiousness
in duty. In all questions of difficulty he never acted
alone, but consulted with us, and was ever ready to
give up his own plan for any other reasonable one.
Iarn sure that I state the opinion of all my brethren
in the diocese when I express my conviction that it
could not have been possible to find a man more

FRESH LABOURERS AND FRESH SORROWS. 155

admirably suited in every way as Bishop of Eastern
Equatorial Africa than Bishop Parker. May our Lord
guide to as successful a choice of a successor !’

One of the first acts of the bishop on reaching the
south end of the lake had been to send a letter to King
Mwanga, assuring him that there was no thought of
taking vengeance on him for the murder of Hannington,
that the Christian teachers wished to be his friends,
and requesting that his subjects might have liberty to
embrace whatever religion they wished. It seemed at
first uncertain whether good or harm was done by this
letter, though on the whole the effect was thought to
be good. The king sent no written answer to it,
merely a verbal message to the effect that he wished-
to be friendly, and inviting the bishop to send him
another European. A letter written to the Baganda
converts was greatly appreciated. It was read again
and again, both in public and in private, and Mr.
Gordon writes to the bishop concerning it :—

‘ Your letter to the Christians has given them much
joy and consolation. I have read it on Sunday morning
at worship some three or four times. In private also
it has been read several times, again and again, to a
few visitors who are unable to come on Sunday. . . .
Henry W. Duta asked me to make him a copy of the
letter, that he might read it to the Christians who
frequent his neighbourhood. Yet again, Zakariya
wants me to write him a copy, which he may read to
the Christians who frequent his neighbourhood.’

Thus did the hearts of the converts in Uganda
respond to the loving sympathy and counsel of one
whom they had never seen, but whom they knew to
be their friend, and thus did the bishop, after he had
entered into rest, speak by his written missive to those
he had died in striving to reach.

156 YHE STORY OF UGANDA.

And in spite of the failure of human plans and the
withering of human hopes the work of God went on.

‘ Inscrutable problems of sin and sorrow,

God’s grand “very good” by their discords jarred;
To-day’s hopes crushed by a harsh to-morrow,

To our eyes, His plans and His workings marred.

And above the floods, Love and Power conceiving
Their fusion into eternity's plan;

From sin and from sorrow one Hand outweaving
Glory to God and goodwill to man.

When our eyes shall behold Him, the Ancient of days,
The work will be ended; peace wrought out of strife;
And in grand vindication of fathomless ways,
Out of death, resurrection—unchangeable life.’

Aut/zor of ‘ Cofs/ey Amzals

CHAPTER XI.

THE REVOLUTION IN UGANDA.

"l‘hcy said in their hearts, Let us destroy them together.’—
1’sAi.M lxxiv. 8.

T was a sorrowful day for the Christians when they

bade farewell to the man who for nine years had
been their teacher and friend, who had passed with
them through trouble, and danger, and sorrow, and
who had been the chief means of putting into their
hands a priceless treasure, the Word of God, which
they might read for themselves. To them truly Mackay
might have addressed the parting words of St. Paul to
the Ephesian elders, ‘And now, brethren, I commend
you to God, and to the word of His grace.’

It must have been about this time that the following
touching letter was written by the Christians in Uganda,
which was translated and forwarded to the Church
Missionary Society Committee by Mr. Ashe. There
appears to be some mistake in the date. Or was it
begun on the date given, and finished later ?

‘BUGANDA MISSION, May 13, 1887.~

‘ Beloved of authority in the Church of Jesus Christ,
our English fathers, and all Christians who love us, our
brethren. We, your Buganda brethren, write to you
to thank you for the letter which you sent us. We

I57

158 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

rejoice much to hear news which came from where you
are to cheer our hearts through our Lord Jesus Christ.

‘We thank God that you have heard of our being
persecuted. Thank God who brought our brother
where you are, Mr. Ashe, and made you understand
the evil which has befallen us Christians in Buganda,
your children whom you have begotten in the Gospel.

‘Mr. ‘Ashe has told you how we are hunted, and
burned in the fire, and beheaded, and called sorcerers,
for the name of Jesus our Lord. And do you thank
God, who has granted to us to suffer here at this time
for the Gospel of Christ.

‘We hope indeed for this thing which you hoped for
us in your letter, namely, that in a short time other
teachers will come to teach. And you who have
authority continue earnestly to beseech Almighty God,
who turned the Emperor of Rome to become a Chris—
tian, who formerly persecuted the name of Jesus as
to-day this our king in Buganda persecutes us. And
do you, our fathers, hope that we may not in the least
degree give up the Word of Christ Jesus. We are
Willing, indeed, to die for the Word of Jesus; but do
you pray for us that the Lord may help us. Finally,
our friends, let your ears, and eyes, and hearts be open
to this place, where we are at Buganda. Now we are
in tribulation at being left alone. Mr. Mackay the
Arabs have driven away out of Buganda. 0 friends,
pity us in our calamity. We, your brethren, who are
in Buganda, send you greetings. May God Almighty
give you His blessing! May He preserve you in
Europe.

‘We remain, your children who love you,
‘ HENRY WRIGHT DUTA,
‘EDW’ARD,
‘ ISAYA MAYANJA.’

 

l\[\VANGA, KING OF UGANDA.

5."

 

THE REVOLUTION [1V UGANDA. 161

The persecuted Christians were not left long alone.
The boat that conveyed Mackay to the south of the
lake returned in a few days with Mr. Gordon, who
reached Uganda on August 18, 1887. He proceeded
at once to the station of the French priests, where he
got some refreshment, and received the keys of the
mission house, and a couple of days later was presented
to the king by the messenger who had brought him.
Mwanga had by no means changed his attitude either
towards the missionaries or towards their work. He
wished to have a white man at his court, chiefly as a
hostage, in case of any possible warlike designs upon
him by the English, his mind being still uneasy about
the murder of Bishop Hannington. The order pro-
hibiting his subjects from coming to the mission house
for teaching had not been cancelled. Nevertheless
many, some baptized converts, and some inquirers, at
once began to gather on Sundays for instruction.
Most of the members of the Church Council were in
hiding. For Samweli and Mika Sematimba the king
watched ‘as greedily as a lion watches and waits for
his prey,’ but the former managed to communicate with
Mr. Gordon by letter. Two others, named Shem and
Paula, ventured to pay a visit to the new teacher, the
latter bringing the present of an ox from the young
Christian Admiral Gabunga, as his welcome. Sembera
Mackay was away with his old master, the chief Isaya
Mayanja, on the king’s business. Henry Wright Duta
and Zakariya, though under sentence of death, dared
to spend some time at the mission house, hoping to
escape detection. The former was useful in helping
Mr. Gordon with the language, and both of them gave
addresses alternately at the Sunday services, to which
the people came in increasing numbers. But danger
turned up, and it was found necessary for Duta and

II

162 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

Zakariya to return to their hiding-places, and later
on there was a report that those who attended the
services were to be arrested. Nothing, however,
came of it.

The year 1887 passed to its end quietly. Then
arrived the letters of Bishop Parker, the one to the
Christians, which awakened so much interest and caused
them so much joy, the other to King Mwanga. The
king was at first exceedingly angry. The letter assured
him that the white men did not wish to take vengeance
for the murder of Bishop Hannington ; but as he would
not acknowledge his guilt in the matter, he was enraged
at its being taken as an understood thing. The danger
to Mr. Gordon was very real, but, like David of old, he
‘encouraged himself in the Lord his God.’ Mwanga,
however, reconsidered the letter, and said he had not
at first understood it, and matters went on as before.

But it was felt that Mr. Gordon ought not to be left
alone in his trying situation, and it was arranged before
the death of Bishop Parker that he should be joined by
the Rev. R. H. Walker. ‘ Bwana Orka’ had an invita-
tion by name from the king, and on Easter Monday,
April 9, I888, he started, reaching Uganda the follow-
ing wéek. Having suffered much from fever on the
journey, he waited eight days before presenting him-
self at Mwanga’s court. Some of the converts were
uneasy about this, and repeated alarming rumours they
had heard. But whatever may have been the founda-
tion for these, the good hand of God was over the
missionaries, and all seemed to go well.

Not since the arrival of Shergold Smith and Wilson,
in April 1877, had such a reception been accorded
to any one as now greeted Mr. Walker. The road to
the palace was lined with soldiers, dressed in native
style, and as the two white men passed between the

THE REVOLUTION IN UGANDA. I63

ranks the drums beat, spears quivered, and a ‘low
tremulous cry’ was kept up. Inside the royal enclosure
they were met by more soldiers in white, who went
through some evolutions, which formed, Mr. Gordon
wrote, quite a pretty display. On entering the palace
the band (drums, bugles, and horns) struck up, and the
king himself with his chiefs rose up to greet them, and
provided them with seats near his throne. When the
court was over the soldiers in white formed in line on
each side of them, and conducted them most of the way
home.

The Arabs were much struck with the honour paid
to the white men, and considered them high in the
king's favour. His actual motive is not quite plain.
It may have been a desire in this way to apologise for
his former treatment ofmissionaries ; but mingled with
this there was doubtless the wish to impress Mr.
Gordon and Mr. Walker by a sight of his greatness,
and even, as the people themselves said, to intimidate
them, so that they might not recur to any painful
subject. After this the work went on quietly, not
actually permitted, yet to a certain degree tolerated;
and day by day the little church in Uganda grew in
Scriptural knowledge, and drew others within the circle
of its influence.

Mwanga had now filled the throne for nearly four
years. Instead of growng stronger and more settled
in his position, he was becoming more and more
disliked by his subjects. Acts of violence and rapacity,
unredeemed by any measures for the good of his
subjects, such as had at times been undertaken by
Mtesa his father, gradually alienated their loyalty.
More especially had he rendered himself obnoxious
to an increasingly growing and powerful party in the
kingdom. These were the ‘readers,’ which term

164 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

included both the disciples of the Protestant and
Romish missionaries, and the adherents of the Moham-
medans. To the ‘readers’ belonged many powerful
chiefs, and the youth and strength of the country
generally. In spite of persecution, the Christian faith
still held its own at the court, and numbered among
its professors some of the king’s most useful officers
and pages.

Mwanga had made more than one attempt to crush
the new life that had risen up in his kingdom ; but the
more he afflicted the Christians, the more, like Israel of
old, ‘they grew and multiplied.’ The Mohammedans
had been tolerated, but even they offended the king
by observing their own rites, especially with respect to
food, refusing to eat of the meat slaughtered by him.
At length he hatched a plot whereby he might rid
himself of the principal ‘readers’ of both parties.

I—le summoned his two body—guards, both of whom
were commanded by Christian leaders, the one an
adherent of the Romanists, the other of the Protestants,
and ordered them to follow him to the lake. He was
accompanied by another guard of personal attendants,
whom he had chosen from among non-readers. His
plan was to send the ‘readers’ to execute his orders
on a certain island, and leave them there to starve,
While the non—readers brought away the canoes. Some
rumour, however, of the king’s treachery reached the
‘readers,’ and on arriving at the lake they refused to
go farther, and returned home. It was now their turn
to plot against their false master, and they took counsel
together what should be done. The Christians did
not wish to go to the length of dethroning Mwanga,
but at length they yielded to the Mohammedans, and
the matter was decided. The hour of retribution for
the tyrant had come.

THE REVOLUTION [1V UGANDA. 165

And yet he was not dealt with as he had dealt
with others. As the two armies entered his capital
by two different roads, the Mohammedans bringing
with them the new king, Kiwewa, an older son of
Mtesa, Mwanga collected his pages and his women,
and fled unmolested to Munyonyo, on the creek. Here
he obtained some canoes, and guided by a fisherman
of Sesse, who had once made a voyage across the
lake, he succeeded in reaching Magu, Where he became
a virtual prisoner in the hands of the Arabs.

Meanwhile, the revolution was effected in the most
peaceful manner. The new king was enthroned
absolutely without the loss of a single life. The
Icalz'lcz'ro fled, and took up his residence by Mtesa’s
tomb. Other chiefs were pardoned and deposed.
The post of lmtz'kz'ro was given to a Romanist, while
that of mukwwzda, the next in importance, fell to the
share of a Protestant ‘ reader,’ Kagwa Apollo (Apollos),
the same who had been so frightfully used by King
Mwanga at the commencement of the persecution of
1886. Other important offices were given to Moham-
medans. Liberty of worship and of teaching was
proclaimed. Measures were introduced for a milder
rule than had hitherto been known in Uganda, and
there was general gladness and rejoicing.

Numbers of Christians now emerged from their
places of concealment, and thronged around the Mission
station. ‘ For a time,’ writes Mr. Gordon, ‘the Baganda
came about the station like swarms of bees; from the
dawn of light to the dusk of evening they crowded
both sides of the house and some of the rooms.’ Alpha—
bet sheets, printed portions, Prayer Books, Epistles,
Gospels, New Testaments (the latter in Kiswahili), were
in great demand, and the congregation at Sunday
morning service rose to the number of three hundred.

166 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

But this state of things was not to last. The new
king, Kiwewa, was a mere puppet in the hands of his
chiefs, and the Mohammedan party soon planned a
second revolution. The Arabs and their Baganda
adherents were dissatisfied at the large share of offices
and dignities which had fallen to the lot of the Chris-
tians. They determined to oust them from their
position, and to put an end to Christianity in Uganda.
Their device was to represent the Christians as rebels,
and they got up a story of an attempt being planned
by the latter to place a woman on the throne, that thus
Uganda might be like England in having a queen.
A charge was accordingly made, and the Christians
were suddenly attacked and defeated. The kalz'kz'ro and
the mu/ewenda fled, and the young Admiral Gabunga
was killed. Some of the fugitives rushed to the
Mission station, and Mr. Gordon and Mr. Walker
were in the act of dressing the wounds of two of
them, when a messenger. arrived from the king, and
summoned them away to a yard in the royal enclosure,
where they found the French priests, and all were
thrust together into a miserable hut, full of rats and
vermin, where they were guarded by soldiers. The
Frenchmen had been able to bring with them blankets
and a scanty supply of provisions, and these they
generously shared with the English missionaries. The
next day some of the prisoners were marched down
to their respective dwellings, to procure a present for
the chief who was guarding them, and on the fifth
day Mr. Gordon and Mr. Walker were taken to their
station in the train of the new kalz'lcl'ro, a Mohammedan,
that they might give up their goods to him. The whole
place was then sacked. Mr. Walker writes :—

‘At first the order was that I might keep all
medicines, provisions, and sufficient bedding and clothes

YHE REVOLUTION [1V UGANDA. 167

for the journey. You might as well have lighted
a fire in the room and asked the flames to spare a
few things. The katz‘lez'ro filled my white iron box
with the things he liked best, and made bundles of
other things. Other chiefs did the same. All this
time we heard the rabble thundering at the doors
downstairs. Gordon went down with the leatz'kz'ro to
give him the keys of his store, etc. He found the
whole place gutted. The doors were smashed, and
some torn off their hinges, and the whole place
stripped and cleared of everything. I remained up-
stairs and watched the most painful sight: boxes of
jam and butter thrown to the crowds in the garden;
men climbing in at the windows, tearing down any
bit of calico they could find, emptying the contents of
the medicine bottles on the floor, tearing the backs
off all the books; smashing up anything they could
not use.’

That night they returned to the hut, but the next
day were taken to the premises of the Frenchmen,
where they passed the night. The following day the
whole party, including twenty natives, men, women,
and children from the French Mission, were conducted
down to the lake and put on board the Eleanor, where
they were robbed once more of some of the few things
remaining to them, Mr. Walker having even to part
with his coat and trousers. They were then let go with
this parting injunction :——

‘Let no white man come to Buganda for the space
of two years. We do not want to see Mackay’s boat
in Buganda waters for a long time to come. We do
not want to see a white teacher back in Buganda
until we have converted the whole of Buganda t0 the
Mohammedan faith.’

There was a little rice and a little wheat on board

!68 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

the boat. The Frenchmen had been allowed to bring
away some cloth and shells wherewith to buy food.
They were dependent on the Englishmen for their means
of transit across the lake, while the latter depended on
them for food. But a terrible disaster now occurred.
They were just leaving an island where they had
landed to cook some food, when a sudden blow struck
the boat with such force as to make two holes in the
port side. It was a hippopotamus. The Eleanor filled
with water and turned over. The two English mis-
sionaries, together with the French bishop, Mgr. Livin-
hac, and Pere Lourdel, as well as the crew of the boat,
were able to swim, and quickly reached the land, which
was not far off. On looking back they found, to their
great joy, that the boat was still afloat on her side, and
the remainder of the passengers clinging to her. By
dint of shouting they roused the only inhabitant of
the island, who brought his canoe to the rescue, and
gradually, by threes and fours, the whole party were
rescued from their perilous position. It was, however,
discovered that five of the Frenchmen’s boys were
missing. One of the priests relates that at the moment
of the accident he quickly baptized some of the boys,
who though under instruction had not yet been admitted
into the visible Church, and that it was these newly
baptized ones, whose conduct had been such as to
warrant their sudden admission, who met their death
in the lake. One cannot help admiring the presence
of mind and devotion of this man, however mistaken in
his ideas. As for the boys themselves, we know that
if with the heart they believed in the Lord Jesus
Christ, as we may trust they did, itwas well with
thenL

A large fire was made, and the wife of the owner of
the canoe did her best to show hospitality to the ship-

THE REVOLUTION IN UGANDA. I69

wrecked party. The next morning their host beat his
drum, to summon some of the natives from the main-
land, which was not far off, to their assistance. Some
boxes and sacks were got out of the boat and brought
to land. Other things which were visible below the
clear water were dived for by the sailors, but much
was lost, and much was spoiled. The boat itself was
brought safely to land, but quite unfit for use. We
give Mr. Walker’s graphic account of how the
damage was repaired, and the journey concluded in
safety.

‘ I went down to see the extent of the damage, and
what tools, etc., could be procured. The hole was a
squarish one, fifteen inches by nine, in one place, and
close down by the keel; another hole was six inches
by three. The tools were a caulking-iron, a spoke or
hurdle shave, a hammer, and a large gimlet, and of
course what nails or screws you might get out of the
other parts of the boat. The fourth of the Frenchmen
is a sort of cook or carpenter. He looked at the boat,
and said it could be mended, but when he found there
were no tools he gave up the job. I felt it a very risky
business to bung up the hole, and ask thirty—three souls
to trust themselves to it for a journey of two hundred
miles, lasting two weeks at least. I went away into
the bushes with Gordon and discussed the other alter-
native. He assured me that to apply to the Baganda
for canoes, or to the Arabs for help, would be alike
useless. I therefore undertook to patch the boat.
With the spokeshaveI chopped a piece of board in two.
I got the board out of the bottom of the boat. One
piece I fixed, with the captain’s help, inside the boat
over the larger hole, and fastened the ends down with
wedges driven under the ribs. Then we got some rope
and pulled it to pieces. Most fortunately the French-

170 THE STORY 01' UGANDA.

men had a pail of dripping; this we worked up into
the tow, and drove it in all round under our board.
Then we filled up the holes with large pads of this tow
and dripping from the outside, and nailed and screwed
pieces of board over them. At about midday of the
third day at the island the boat was pronounced to be
ready for sea.

‘I confess I felt bad as we rowed away from shore,
miles away from land, thirty-four souls on board, and
only a pad of tow and dripping to keep the water out.
The good hand of the Lord was upon us. We came on
slowly day by day, buying food with the Frenchmen’s
shells, sleeping in grass-built huts at night, or on the
sandy shores by large fires. What was wetted by the
rain was soon dried by the sun. After seventeen
days of this life we came to the Frenchmen’s house1
at midnight. They soon knocked their surprised
brethren up, and gave us a good supper and a good
bed.’

The next day Mr. Gordon and Mr. Walker reached
Usambiro, where they were welcomed by Mackay, and
were able to enjoy a rest after all that they had under-
gone. But with respect to the perils they had passed
through, Mr. Walker writes :—-

‘ For ourselves, it is very pleasant to be reminded that
“man does not live by bread alone ”; that what we
consider to be the necessaries of life are not really so;
that God can easily support our lives apart from these
things. We were kept in perfect health and strength
without our usual food, our comfortable clothes, and
snug beds. Though a good deal exposed to the heat
of the sun by day, and the chill and damp by night,
yet, altogether apart from any medicine, we in no way
suffered. Many prayers were being offered up for us,

' The Mission Station at Ukumbi.

THE REVOLUTION IN UGANDA. t7!

and we realised this fact by the quiet cheerfulness that

was given to us in the assurance of the presence of
God.’

He is keeping watch o'er His Church below,
Her safety is in His hand ;

Through the night of fear, o‘er the waters drear,
He will bring her safe to land.

S. G. S.

CHAPTER XII.

THE CHURCH IN EXILE.
‘I the Lord do keep it.’———IsA. xxvii. 3.

HEN the news reached home of the storm
which burst upon Uganda in October 1888,
it looked as though a full end had been made of the
Mission there. The station destroyed, the missionaries
driven out, many of the Christians slain, the Arabs,
the foes of the work from the beginning, triumphant——
this seemed the conclusion of the enterprise on which
so much money, thought, pains, and prayer had been
expended, and for which so many had laid down their
lives. Nevertheless the friends of the Mission did not
lose heart. They remembered that more than once
before in the history of Missions an apparent collapse
has been the prelude to better and brighter things.
And they knew that ‘whatsoever God doeth it shall be
for ever.’1 The work in Uganda had been HIS doing,
and if for a time He had taken it utterly out of the
hand of man, it was but to mature it in the shadow
of His own hand.
The missionaries themselves naturally felt the ap-
parent overthrow of all for which they had laboured,
the closing up of the door through which the Gospel

' Eccles. iii. 14.
I72

THE CHURCH IN EXILE. 173

had reached so many. But even the one who had
arrived the latest in Uganda was not discouraged.
Writing from Usambiro in December, Mr. Walker
says :—

‘I must assure you that prayer has not been
answered in the way we expected, but in a way that
God saw was much better for us. Quite possibly
matters were going too quickly in Buganda, and the
Christians who had been made chiefs, and some of
these very important ones, may have been in danger of
unduly using temporal power to establish Christianity.’

But again he says: ‘The work was founded upon
a rock, and such a storm as has swept over the land
cannot overthrow it.’

The news of the first revolution, with the fall and
flight of Mwanga, reached Mr. Mackay before he had
any tidings from the missionaries. Hearing that the
king had escaped with a few followers, and was at
Magu, on the shores of Speke Gulf, in a miserable
plight, he sent to offer him a refuge at Usambiro.
‘Murderer and persecutor as he had been,’ writes
Mackay, ‘1 yet have not the faintest doubt but that it
becomes us to do everything in our power to return
him good for evil.’ The king was eager to avail
himself of this friendly offer; but fearing that if he
started the Arabs would follow and arrest him, he
implored Mackay to come himself to his assistance.
This, however, the latter could not do, as he felt that
such a proceeding might affect the position of his
brethren in Uganda. Later on Mwanga escaped from
the Arabs, and was received by the French priests at
Ukumbi.

Meanwhile, what had become of his Christian subjects,
made homeless fugitives by the second revolution?
In Busagala, better known as N/eorz', or N/eole, to the

174 , THE STORY OF UGANDA.

west of Uganda, God had provided a refuge for His
persecuted and hunted people. Hither, when Mwanga
sought to arrest him, had fled Mika Sematimba.
Hearing of the fall of his old master, Mika had set out
to return home; but on the way he met his fellow-
believers fleeing from the Arabs, and heard from them
of what had further taken place. He at once invited
them to return with him to the country where he had
found an asylum, in which they were well received by
the king, Ntale. Nkole is described by Mackay as the
home of the royal race Wahuma, a people in many
respects superior to the tribes round about them.
Here most of the Christian ‘readers,’ baptized and
nnbaptized, settled for the time, while a few fled to
Unyoro, and a little handful joined the missionaries
at Usambiro.

From June 1889 (when letters appeared written at
Usambiro the previous December), until the close of
November, nothing was heard from the brethren on
the shores of the Nyanza. The disturbed state of the
country, owing to the resistance offered by the natives
to the advance of the Germans in Usagara and Usogo,
completely cut them off from the outer world, and the
bearers of mails despatched by them to the coast were
unable to pass. The mails, moreover, were lost, and
the next letters received were of various dates, from
March to September. These letters gave the history
of eight months, and were full of thrilling interest.
The curtain was at length lifted which had shut out
the Nyanza Mission from sight, and the brethren were
seen still ‘holding the fort’ at the south end of the
lake, courageous, persevering, diligent, and hopeful,
while the fact was disclosed that a large and powerful
body of adherents to Christianity were holding together
in the land that sheltered them, watching their oppor-

 

'/
/
1

.1.

‘/
’/
P

 

 

     

.54”

WWv

 

may.”

,1»,

 

THE CHURCH 11V EXILE. I77

tunity to return to their own country, and as eager as
ever for instruction in the truths of the Bible.

The Protestants had chosen the chief Nikodemo
(Sebwato) to preside over them, and to represent them
at the court of the King of Nkole, and he was assisted
by the Church Council, and by other Christian ex-
chiefs. While recognising the Roman Catholics as
brethren, they were often troubled by differences with
them ; these differences being, however, mostly political.
The latter were bent on restoring Mwanga to the throne
of Uganda by force of arms, after first obtaining from
him the promise of religious liberty. The following
letter, translated by Mr. Gordon, was written to Mr.
Markay by Sebwato Nikodemo, informing him of the
condition of the exiles, and asking for advice:

‘ BUSAGALA, MONDAY, [Marc]; 4, 1889.
‘ My BROHIER, MR. MACKAY,——

‘1, your brother, who love you much, write
you this letter to salute you with much peace to-day.
For many days we do not see each other, nor do I hear
your news.

Now these things I tell you, my brother, that at this
time the Christians are very many here at Nkole.
They number about one thousand in all, with women.
Then from over there in Buganda they are coming,
they are coming out of their hiding-places, and on the
road they do not cease to come. So for this reason we
have found much trouble, and hunger in plenty; the
people are nearly dying. And now all the people are
wanting to return to Buganda, to fight with the people
of the Koran again, a second time. Well then, we
want you, our brethren, if you accept these plans, to

12

178 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

write to us a letter quickly that we may hear. Besides,
also, all matters that you have, do you write to us
about, that we may understand your counsel, that you
are advising and thinking about. But then, our brethren,
when we left Buganda, we came in two crowds, (we)
and our brothers (the followers) of the Pope. But we
do not pull well together. They are always wanting to
fight with us (who are) in these troubles and difficulties.
However, we want you to write a letter and send it to
the French priests, that they may make us come to an
agreement. The end.
‘ I am,
‘ SEBWATo.’

This letter, with another from Samweli, was brought
to Usambiro about Easter, by some of the Baganda,
whose visit gladdened the hearts of the missionaries.
Earnest advice was given them on no account to enter
on a war, but to settle down quietly to cultivate the
land which the King of Nkole had given them. They
carried back with them to their brethren a box of books
and paper—a great prize l—and also a bale of calico
for the destitute amongst them, the cost of which was
charged by Mr. Mackay to the Tinnevelly Fund. But
at the same time that these messengers came to Mackay
others appeared at Ukumbi, sent by the Romanist
exiles, to invite Mwanga to return and fight for his
throne. He was only too glad to accept the invitation,
and having been conveyed to the mainland in the boat
of Mr. Stokes, the English trader, he summoned all
loyal Baganda to join him.

In the meantime a third revolution had taken place
in Uganda. The Arabs were dissatisfied with their
puppet, Kiwewa, and succeeded in dethroning and
murdering him, not before he had killed two of the

THE CHURCH IN EXILE. I79

chief ministers—one of Whom was Mujasi, the torturer
and murderer of the first three boy-martyrs, with his
own hand. There was now but one prince left, Kalema
(or Karema), and he signalised his accession to the
throne by putting to death all the royal family on whom
he could lay his hands.

Mwanga's appeal was responded to both by Ro-
nianists and Protestants, the latter having been drawn
into war before the messengers could return from
Usambiro.

In the struggle three of the bitterest opponents of
Christianity were slain, the former roleino, who had
been instrumental in the death of Bishop Hannington,
the murderer of Gabunga (the young Christian admiral),
and the Arab Masudi, who used to translate for the
king the letters that arrived from Zanzibar, and who
had so often falsified them, to the prejudice of the
missionaries. One cannot but call to mind the pro-
phecy of Rev. xi. 5, concerning the enemies of the ‘two
witnesses’: ‘If any man will hurt them, he must in
this manner be killed.’ The old leaz‘z'lezlfo, also, who,
though he had now and then favoured the missionaries
for his own ends, had been a most bitter persecutor of
the converts, was, when the third revolution broke out,
burnt to death in his house.

Mwanga’s attempt to regain the throne did not at first
meet with success, and he was compelled to flee to the
Sesse Islands, the inhabitants of which were on his side,
and supplied him with canoes. Thence be advanced
up Murchison Bay, and established himself on the
island of Bulinguge. He then despatched messengers
both to the French priests and to the missionaries at
Usambiro, inviting them to send teachers for the people
who were with him, and also begging their aid to
recover his kingdom. The following letter was brought

180 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

to Mr. Mackay by Duta, Sematimba, and Thomas
Semfuma.

‘BULINGUGE,]zme 25, 1889.
‘To MR. MACKAY.

‘I send very many compliments to you and to
Mr. Gordon.

‘ After compliments, I, Mwanga, beg of you to help
me. Do not remember bygone matters. We are now
in a miserable plight, but if you, my fathers, are will—
ing to come and help to restore me to my kingdom, you
will be at liberty to do Whatever you like.

‘ Formerly I did not know God, but now I know the
religion of Jesus Christ. Consider how Kalema has
killed all my brothers and sisters; he has killed my
children too, and now there remain only we two princes
(Kalema and himself). Mr. Mackay, do help me; I
have no strength; but if you are with me I shall be
strong. Sir, do not imagine that if you restore
Mwanga to Buganda he will become bad again. If
you find me become bad, then you may drive me from
~the throne; but I have given up my former ways, and
I only Wish now to follow your advice.

‘ I am your friend,
‘ MWANGA.’

The request put forward could not, of course, be for
a moment entertained, but to the appeal for teachers
Mr. Mackay was eager to respond. He had been sorely
tried by the lack of reinforcements, it having been
found impossible, in the disturbed state of the country,
to send fresh men up to the lake. ‘At Ukumbi,’ he
writes, ‘there are sixteen Roman Catholic missionaries.
Three of these mean to avail themselves of Mwanga’s
invitation, and are about to proceed at once to Sesse,

THE CHURCH IN EXILE. 181

to look after their flock. . . . Christian England, which
takes such a “deep interest” in Buganda and Central
Africa, has furnished the mighty force of two Protest-
ant missionaries, Mr. Gordon and myself. How many
out of our number of two are expected to be ready to
respond to Mwanga’s invitation, and go to supply the
spiritual wants of the Protestant Christian Church in
Buganda?’

Messrs. Walker and Deekes were then at Nassa,
endeavouring to break up the fallow ground, and
winning the confidence of the natives. But Mr.
Mackay, finding that serious danger threatened them
from the Arabs at Magu, sent the Eleanor to Nassa to
fetch them to Usambiro. Shortly after their arrival Mr.
Gordon and Mr. Walker left Usambiro in canoes sent
by Mwanga, and proceeded to the island of Bulinguge,
where they met with a hearty welcome from the Chris-
tians who were with Mwanga, of whom there were
about one thousand, six hundred being Romanists,
the remainder Protestants. The greater number of the
Protestants were still on the mainland, in Budu. Here
the missionaries had plenty to do in attending to the
sick and wounded (some astonishing feats of surgery
being performed by Mr. Walker), and several of the
yet unbaptized adherents of the Mission were glad of
the opportunity to receive baptism. Meanwhile the
Christians on the mainland, under the command of
Kagwa Apollo, marched towards Buganda, and were
met by the army of Kalema. The former gained a
complete victory ; Kalema took to flight ; and on October
II, 1889, exactly a year after the expulsion of the
Christians, Mwanga was escorted back to his kingdom
by those whom he had persecuted and sought to
destroy out of his country. The man whom he had
once cruelly wounded with his own hand, and whose

182 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

valour had won him back his throne, now became
leatz'lez'ro, and all the high offices filled by the followers
of the ‘Book,’ being about equally distributed between
Protestants and Romanists.

Mr. Gordon and Mr. Walker returned with the king.
They found their old dwelling—place at Natete a wilder-
ness—mounds of earth overgrown with long grass and
tall plants. But another piece of land was given them
on the hill Mengo, near the capital; and the Christians
immediately set to work to build a house for them and
supply their ordinary needs.

But the position was still a precarious one. Kalema
and his followers were not far off, prepared on the
first good opportunity to make an attack on Mwanga.
The army of the latter was by no means strong.
‘They are not,’ writes Mr. Walker, ‘trained soldiers,
and can only be kept up by a series of successes and
constant action. Their engagements seem to take the
nature of a general rush, in which every man fires his
gun. If big men on the other side fall, then victory is
assured to this party, and they carry all before them.
I should say that the first ten minutes determine the
day.’ While yet on the island of Bulinguge a message
had been sent by Mwanga and the Christians to the
representatives of the British East Africa Company,
who were at Kavirondo, to beg assistance from them;
and in December letters arrived from them, together
with one of the company’s flags. Mwanga, in accepting
the flag, virtually put himself under the company’s
protection; but he did not appear to understand all
that such a step involved. By the time, however, that
this letter arrived Mwanga was back again on the
island of Bulinguge, having been driven from the
mainland by Kalema’s army. The missionaries were
roused up in the middle of the night, and Sebwato

THE CHURCH [1V EXILE. 183

Nikodemo came to convey them in safety to the island,
whither the king had fled. Here Christmas 1889 was
spent, amid many privations, although the Christians
did their best for their teachers.

But in the beginning of February 1890, a fresh
supply of guns and powder having arrived in Mr.
Stokes’ boat, in the shape of ransom for an Arab who
had been taken prisoner, Kalema was again attacked
and defeated, and Mwanga with his party returned to
Mengo. Here the king received Dr. Carl Peters, of
the German East African Association, and signed a
treaty with the Germans. This was done with the
concurrence of the French priests and their followers.
But the leafikiro, with the Protestant chiefs, declined to
be a party to it, considering that the king was already
pledged to Mr. Jackson, of the British East Africa
Company. Their refusal, however, brought about such
dissension that the missionaries begged them, for peace’
sake, not to hold out. The visit of the Germans seems
to have had the effect of giving the people a sense of
security, and they began to settle down again, to
rebuild their houses, and bring their land once more
under cultivation.

In spite of the desolate condition of the country from
the ravages of war, and the consequent poverty of the
people, one of the first acts of the Christian chiefs was
to commence the erection of a church. The site chosen
was on a plot of land called Kitesa (the same on which
the Mission premises were situated), and the size of
the building was about eighty feet by twenty-four.
Some of the poles employed required six men to lift
them.

But in the midst of the success and the joy in
Uganda, a blow which seemed crushing fell upon the
Victoria Nyanza Mission. On April 2 a man came

184 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

to Mr. Walker with the message: ‘ Mackay is dead,
and Deekes is dying.’ On February 8, the man who
had for twelve years been the mainstay of the Mission
breathed his last at Usambiro. ‘We do not want to
see Mackay’s boat again in these waters,’ had been the
words of the Mohammedans, as they drove out the
missionaries in October 1888; and never again was it
to touch the shores of Uganda. The vessel had done
its work, and was worn out. The man who had put
her together, and who had completed another boat to
replace her, the man whom all Uganda knew and
respected, and whom heathen and Mohammedans
feared, the man whom they looked upon as inseparably
connected with the cause of Christ in those regions,
was never again to revisit the land for which he had
toiled and prayed. But the cause of Christ, his Master
and King, had triumphed over all foes and all obstacles,
and before he closed his eyes on earth he was able to
write :—

‘The greatest, and till recently the most tyrannical
power in all East Africa, is now in the hands of men
who rejoice in the name of CHRISTIAN.’

‘ \Vhen the twilight gathers fast,
\Vith a quiet still and deep,
When the busy day has past,
And the weary “falls on sleep”;
\Vhen the lifelong toil is o’er,
At the setting of the sun,
Comes joy for evermore
With the Master’s word, “ IVe/Z a’om’l”

’Mid the tread of many feet,
’Mid the hurry and the throng,
In the burden and the heat,
Have the working hours seemed long?
Softly the shadow falls,
And the pilgrim’s race is run;
\Vhile through celestial halls
Resounds the glad “ [Va/Z done!"

THE CHURCH IN EX]LE._ 185

Well worth the daily cross; .
Well worth the earnest toil;
Well worth reproach and loss,
The fight on stranger soil!
Let us lift our hearts and pray,
And take our journey on;
\Vork while ’tis called to-day
\Vith the thought of that “ W721! clone! ”’

Aid/(or of ‘ Copyley Aimals.’

CHAPTER XIII.

LABOUR AND REST BY THE LAKE.

‘ They rest from their labours, and their works do follow them.’—
REV. xiv. 13.

E must turn now to see what had been going
on‘at the south end of the lake while events
so rapidly succeeded one another in Uganda.

When Mr. Gordon and Mr. Walker arrived at
Usambiro, after their expulsion from Uganda, they
found there Mr. Mackay and Mr. Deekes, the latter
having come from Nassa on a visit. Mr. Douglas
Hooper was then alone at Nassa, and he wrote on
October 12, 1888: ‘You will be glad to hear that
our chief Kapongo still keeps quiet, and as time goes
on we are getting to know the people better, and they
to have more confidence in us.’

But at the beginning of 1889, feeling keenly the
need of more workers, Mr. Hooper set off to return
home and stir up others to go out with him. He had
a somewhat perilous journey, owing to the unsettled
state of the country. He was detained by the Arab
chief Bushiri at the coast, after the missionaries from
Usagara had been allowed to depart, on account of his
having come from the interior; but at length he arrived
safely in England, to make known the pressing needs
of Africa.

186

LABOUR AND REST BY THE LAKE. 187

His place at Nassa was taken by Mr. Walker and
Mr. Deekes. A pleasing picture of the situation of this
station is given by the former. He writes :———

‘ A strong wind blows all day from off the lake, and
at nights the wind—which I suppose is from the land—
is kept of? by the hill that rises very abruptly behind
the house. The cool wind, the View of the wide
expanse of water with its white-crested waves, are
most refreshing, and make this certainly one of the
most pleasantly situated stations I have seen. Two
rocks, whitewashed by the birds, I fancy, are very
conspicuous, though at a great distance, as they stand
out of the blue waters. Across the gulf we see the
hills of the mainland. This is always a pretty sight,
whether they appear to be sleeping in the distant haze
during the heat of the day, or rejoicing in the ruddy
beams of the setting sun. Looking east, we have a fine
View, over a tree-covered plain, of a range of hills
formed of broken lumps of granite, and Well covered
with small trees. Either by climbing the hill behind
this house, or by a short walk round the base of it to
the other side, we look far away over a cultivated plain
of rich black soil towards Magu, a little to the west of
due south. Looking more west still, we have a fine
view of the open lake as far as the eye can reach, and
also of the large island of Ukerewe.’

The district is well populated, and the missionaries
found the people fairly friendly. But they showed no
interest whatever in the Gospel message. They seemed
to lead an easy and tolerably contented life, aiming no
further than the supply of their immediate wants and
desires. And they had not yet learned to look with
confidence upon a white man, and to believe him to be.
their friend. ‘There is no disguising the fact,’ writes
Mr. Walker, ‘that the people want our wealth, not us.

I88 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

We are allowed to live here much as their own fowls
are in their villages, for the sake of the eggs they lay.’

Before six months were over the missionaries were
obliged to leave Nassa. Mr. Mackay, learning that
serious danger threatened them from the Arabs in the
neighbourhood, sent the Eleanor, as has been already
related, to fetch them away, and shortly afterwards
Mr. Walker started with Mr. Gordon to join Mwanga.

Meanwhile, the station at Usambiro had not been
exempt from danger. About the time of the revolution
in Uganda, the chief of the place, Makolo, had been
attacked by several enemies, and the Mission thus
placed in considerable peril. But for timely help ‘I
fear,’ writes Mackay, ‘old Makolo’s name would have
to be wiped out from the maps.1 I made,’ he continues,
‘ every preparation to defend the Mission property and
the lives of our servants, and the women and children
in case of an attack, but I took strict precautions to
avoid absolute hostilities, except in case of dire neces-
sity, being prepared to pay even a heavy indemnity,
should I be able to get the leaders of the invading
party to consent to negotiation. Thank God, we were
untouched, but we have had a weary and anxious time
of watching night and day. The reinforcements which
came to our aid are now returning homewards, and we
are once more at peace. I ask you to join with me in
devout thankfulness to our Heavenly Father for all
His mercies, and His gracious protection.’

The Arabs, not satisfied with having turned the
missionaries out of Uganda, did their best to get them
expelled also from Usambiro. They spread about false
reports of What happened at the coast, and made out
that the white men were getting the worst of it in the
conflict with the natives, and that even many English-

' African Villages are named after their chiefs,
r:

\[

. x ‘\ _ ,.
. \ \\ K
\ x \\ \\\‘
\\\\\\\\ \ § \\. \
\\\\\ “MW\§\\A\\\V\V \\x
«Y \\\\\\w\\\\\\w\w\§‘ . X
\\ \\\ \\\‘ \v\\\
. . \\wm\w\\w\\mw\
\\\ \\\t \ \x \ _

3Q \

\

‘ < \kaN VxV\\\‘\\ . ‘ ‘ {x
\\§\\\\x\\\\\\\\\\ \\\x l \\\\\V ‘
. ~ \\ \ \ \\ \
\Afixuxvxwxx \\V\\N\
\ \:\\\ \\ VwWQNN
: \\\\ ‘ \ \\
.Swwxxxm \\\\\\§N
\\\\\\\\\\Wmm\\\s\ , \\\\ \\;\\\\\

\\ \\
x \ \x
\\ \ \\ \x
\ \ \\x \ \\ _
\ \\ x \xx \\\
\ xx \wa \b§\\\\\\\§\\§\\
\\\\\\ \\\\\\

\\\\

\x \x

‘
\\\“\WM\M\W\\\\x
§\\“§ _

x§§\\\\\\\

\\

xv \\\\\ \\\\M\ .
. ‘ \\\\\\\

~ \ \\\\.. \
‘ : <«\\\W\\\\\\\

\\\\\\N \\
. \Nxvfivfix

\\

\ u
\‘\

. .1\\\\\\\\ \ \

\&\\\\\WM \\

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\

 

MACKAY.

ALEXANDER M

 

LABOUR AZVD REST BY THE LAKE. i 19!

men had been slain, thus hoping to lower the prestige
of the latter, and encourage the chiefs to attack them.
From Magu they sent a message to Rwoma (the chief
who had once played Hannington false) to turn them
out, but he refused. They then despatched a letter to
Kalema in Uganda, begging him to send a fleet of
canoes and an army, to drive the white men from the
shores of the lake. This request was also unsuccessful,
and in spite of the bitter hostility of the Mohammedans,
the Mission stations at Usambiro and Nassa remained
untouched.

And all along, through uncertainty and danger,
through evil report and good report, Mr. Mackay worked
on unweariedly. He was revising his translation of St.
John’s Gospel into Luganda, and was much helped by
some of the converts who had taken refuge at Usam-
biro. These converts also received instruction both in
reading and writing, and in manual labour. One or
two of them were taught to help in the printing office
he had set up, whence sheets of reading matter were
issued for use in Uganda, after the return of the Chris-
tians thither. He was also busily engaged in boat-
building. This was a task demanding an immense
amount of labour and perseverance. The forest was
twenty miles distant, and the logs when cut down were
too heavy either to be carried or dragged to the build-
ing place. Mackay therefore set to work and con-
structed a waggon, the first ever seen in these regions,
and a great wonder to the natives. The month of
April 1889 he spent in the forest with a gang of
labourers, felling trees, and preparing and transporting
the timber. ‘It was very wet,’ he writes, ‘ being the
rainiest month in the year, and the long dripping grass,
six feet high, was often very unpleasant. Finally, I
had to give up, as the ground got too soft for the

192 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

wheels.’ As soon as the dry season set in the work
recommenced.

A temporary boat was built under Mackay’s super-
intendence to replace the Eleanor. But his ambition
was to put together a steam-launch, to be called the
James Hannington, which would greatly facilitate
communication by means of the lake. He had been
expecting an engineer to assist in this work, but the
eagerly looked for helper never arrived, being unable
to get up country. Nothing daunted by this disap-
pointment, Mackay persevered in his work. On
December 28, 1889, he writes :—

‘The three-cylinder steam-engine and two steam
feed-pumps stand now completely fitted and ready for
the boiler. The boiler has been a more serious under-
taking. . . . All these years these segments of thin
quarter-inch plate have been subjected to every kind
of vicissitude and rough treatment. Some parts were
never apparently supplied at all, and have had to be
made now. For years the unwieldy shells lay about
in a cow-byre at Kagei. With great trouble they
were got across the lake to Buganda. Some essential
parts were more than once lost, but subsequently
happily recovered. In Buganda, with its moist climate,
I had the greatest difficulty to prevent the plates from
being altogether destroyed by rust. There we never
could get permission to erect our machinery, except
at the capital, where it was useless. Subsequentlyl
had not only the boiler shells, but also our machinery,
piping, etc., shipped over here before I left the country
in July of 1888. Want of proper accommodation here
has also added to the damage already done to the
plates, while now, after all this knocking about, I found
to my amazement that what was once soft iron of
‘ best’ quality had developed into a material of a steely,

LABOUR AND REST BY THE LAKE. 193

brittle nature, which cracks and splits on the first touch
of the hammer. I have therefore had to resort to the
process of annealing the whole—a tedious operation
where no annealing furnace exists, and the best I have
is a tiny, portable forge.’

Mr. Stanley at his reception at the Church Mis-
sionary House thus spoke of the work, which he had
himself witnessed :—

‘ Mr. Mackay had a steamer building there (pointing
to the map). The timber that was to form its hull
was in the forest in the year 1889. The pieces of iron
and steel and tubes, which were to make the engine,
were scattered over all the large workroom which they
had built, and I suppose the mechanics were making
about three or four threads a day for one tube. Just
imagine ! I fancy the millennium would have come before
the steamer would have been launched. There was
a canoe there building, and in making into a barge, but
[should have been afraid to risk my precious life in
that canoe across the lake to Uganda.’

It was on August 28, the day after Messrs. Gordon
and Walker had started to join King Mwanga, that
Stanley arrived at Usambiro, with Emin Pasha and
between seven and eight hundred people. The account
of his arrival and his meeting with Mackay, with his
description of the station, must be given in his own
words.1

‘Ilaving already sent messengers ahead, that we
might not take Mr. Mackay, of the Church Missionary
Society, by surprise, we arrived in View of the English
Mission, which was built in the middle of What appeared
to be no better than a grey waste, on ground gently
sloping from curious heaps of big boulders or enor-
mous blocks thrown higgledy-piggledy to the height of

' In Darkest Africa, vol. ii., p. 386.

194 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

a respectable hill, down to a marshy flat green with
its dense cropof papyrus, beyond which we saw a
gleam of a line of water, produced from an inlet of the
Victoria Nyanza. We were approaching the Mission
by a waggon track, and presently we came to the
waggon itself, a simple thing on wooden wheels, for
carrying timber for building. There was not a green
thing in view, except in the marsh; grass all dead,
trees either shrunk, withered, or dead—at least there
was not the promise of a bud anywhere, which was of
course entirely due to the dry season. When we were
about half a mile off, a gentleman of small stature, with
a rich brown beard and brown hair, dressed in white
linen and a grey Tyrolese hat, advanced to meet us.

“‘And so you are Mr. Mackay? Mwanga did not
get you, then this time ? What experiences, you must
have had with that man! But you look so well, one
would say you had been to England lately.”

“‘Oh no; this is my twelfth year.1 Mwanga per-
mitted me to leave, and the Rev. Cyril Gordon took
my place; but not for long, since they were all shortly
after expelled from Uganda.”

‘Talking thus, we entered the circle of tall poles,
within which the Mission station was built. There
were signs of labour, and constant, unwearying patience,
sweating under a hot sun. . . . There was a big, solid
workshop in the yard, filled with machinery and tools;
a launch’s boiler was being prepared by the black-
smith, a big canoe was outside repairing; there were
saw-pits and logs of hard timber; there were great
stacks of palisade poles; in a corner of an outer yard
was a cattle-fold and a goat-pen—fowls by the score
pecked at microscopic grains; and out of the European

‘ Twelfth on the shores of the lake. Mr. Mackay had been fourteen
years in Africa.

LABOUR AND REST BY THE LAKE. 195

quarter there trooped out a number of little boys and
big boys, looking uncommonly sleek and happy; and
quiet labourers came up to bid us, with hats ofl, “ Good-
morning." ‘

alt: ’li’: ~16 a‘é * 4s

‘1 was ushered into a room of a substantial clay
structure, the walls about two feet thick, evenly
plastered, and garnished with missionary pictures and
placards. There were four separate ranges of shelves,
filled with choice, useful books. “ Allah ho Akbar,”
replied Ilassan, his Zanzibar headman, to me, “books!
Mackay has thousands of books; in the dining-room,
bedroom, the church, everywhere. Books! ah, loads
upon loads of them!” And while I was sipping real
coffee, and eating home—made bread and butter for the
first time after thirty months, I thoroughly sympathised
with Mackay’s love of books.’

Mr. Mackay handed over to Mr. Stanley some goods‘
which had been lying for a considerable time at the
mission house, intended for him, as well as his later
mails. The earlier ones had unfortunately gone on
to Uganda, and had been lost in the general pillage
there. lie also did his best to supply the most press-
ing wants of the party. He writes :—

‘I could use no ceremony with them, and simply
gave them plain food—“ family broth "—and plenty
of it. Rags, it is true, most of them were in ; but I hope
they left a little better provided in that way than they
arrived. Only a little, mind, not much; for so great
a number of Europeans at once coming on a station
when I had not much in the way of supplies, meant
very little relief for each individually.’

But Mr. Stanley says that ‘ on the Europeans 0f the
expedition the effects of regular diet and well-cooked

I96 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

food, of amiable society and perfect restfulness, was
marvellous.’

The party remained at Usambiro from August 28
till September 17. Mr. Mackay writes :—

‘ I can assure you it was an agreeable change to me
to see nearly a dozen white faces all at once, and to
enjoy for nearly twenty days the pleasant company of
gentlemen, mostly English.’

And Stanley thus records the impression left upon
him by all that he saw :—

‘Everything you saw was an evidence of industry
and hard work. He (Mr. Mackay) had made his own
waggons, his own fortifications, his own headoquarters;
he had built the machine-house and the work-house
there, and he had his people at work on the machinery.
Now in the evening, before going to bed, I used to hear
Mackay and his young Christians singing hymns and
saying prayers. Now, it was very hard work; think
of the hot sun, with the thermometer between 80° and
100°, and nothing but bad water to drink. Whether
filtered or cooked, it is poison all the same. Then
half the morning is devoted to chaffering and bargaining
with the natives. A native brings a fowl, or something
else which he wants to sell, but there is nobody to buy
except poor Mackay.

5‘3: as 1.1 w 7» :.~ vs

‘He should have been head-diplomatist, or prime
minister, if you please, of the Equatorial Mission, and
some other body, a Bible-reader, perhaps, should have
been the storekeeper and treasurer, if you like; and
another party should have been set to teach the young
boys day after day, instead of going far into the night
after the hot day’s work. These things and others we
talked over ourselves every evening at dinner, from about

LABOUR AND REST BY THE LAKE. 197

six to half—past eight o’clock, and we could see for our-
selves what the troubles of the missionaries were.’ 1

And further :—

‘A clever writer lately wrote a book about a man
who spent much time in Africa, which from beginning
to end is a long-drawn wail. It would have cured both
writer and hero of all moping to have seen the manner
of Mackay‘s life. He has no time to fret and groan
and weep. . . . To see one man of this kind, working
day after day for twelve years bravely, and without a
syllable of complaint or moan amid the “ wildernesses,”
and to hear him lead his little flock to show forth God’s
lovingkindness in the morning, and His faithfulness
every night, is worth going a long journey for the moral
courage and contentment that one derives from it.’ 2

Moan, however, Mackay did make in his letters,
though not for himself, but for the land and for the
people whose cause lay heavy on his heart, and on
behalf of whom he ceased not to put forth the most
touching appeals for fresh labourers.

Stanley begged him to return home with him, but
the indomitable missionary would not leave his post.
‘I shall never forget,’ writes Mr. Mounteney Jephson
(of Stanley’s expedition), ‘the morning we left Usam-
biro. He walked part of the way with us, and wished
us good—bye; and one’s whole heart went out to him
when he took my hand and wished me God-speed.
That lonely figure standing on the brow of the hill,
waving farewell to us, will ever remain vividly in my
mind.’ And he adds :—

‘Afriea is such a hard mistress to serve, and she is
so pitiless to her servants.’

' From Stanley’s speech at his reception at the Church Missionary
llzmsc, July 1, 1890,
"' In [Mr/cart Afrim.

198 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

True enough ; but Alexander Mackay served a higher
employer—One who never forgets or leaves unrecom-
pensed the least thing done for Him, even to the ‘cup of
cold water given for His sake—One who can prosper
the work of His servants, and who can call them home
to rest and joy eternal, while He Himself watches over
and cares for the work they have left. And but a few
months longer were left for Mackay to toil under the
burning African sun.

On January 2, 1890, he wrote his last message to
English Christians, headed, ‘Gleanings from Buganda.’1
He says :—

‘ Mwanga writes, “ I want a host of English teachers
to come and preach the Gospel to my people.” Our
Church members urge me to write imploring you to
strengthen our Mission, not by two or three, but by
twenty. Is this golden opportunity to be neglected,
or is it to be lost for ever ?

‘You sons of England, here is a field for your
energies. Bring with you your highest education and
your greatest talents; you will find scope for the
exercise of them all. You men of God who have
resolved to devote your lives to the cure of the souls
of men, here is the proper field for you. It is not to
win numbers to a Church, but to win men to the
Saviour, and who will otherwise be lost, that I entreat
you to leave your work at home to the many who are
ready to undertake it, and to come forth yourselves
to reap this field now white to the harvest. Rome
is rushing in with her salvation by sacraments, and a

preligion of carnal ordinances. We want men who will
preach Jesus and the Resurrection. “ God is a Spirit,”
and let him who believes z‘hat throw up every other

' Published in the C/mrc/L [Missionary Cleaner for June of the same
year.

 

.O~:fl2<m3 .~.< H206. m.QOO

 

 

 

 

 

 

LABOUR AND REST BY THE LAKE. 201

consideration, and come forth to teach these people to
worship Him in spirit and in truth.
‘ “ Forget also thine own people and thy father’s house:
So'shall the King desire thy beauty:

Instead of thy fathers shall be thy children,
Whom thou shalt make PRINCES in all the eartl1."’

And to a personal friend who had urged his coming
home to stir up fresh workers, he says :—

‘But what is this you write—“ Come home ”?
Surely now, in our terrible dearth of workers, it is not
the time for any one to desert his post. Send us only
our first twenty men, and I may be tempted to come
to help you to find‘the second twenty.’

It was about a month after this that the call came
to him to ‘ come up higher.’ He had made arrange-
ments for Mr. Deekes, his only fellow—labourer at
Usambiro, who was greatly suffering in his health, to
return home. But on the morning Mr. Deekes was to
start, Mackay was taken with a severe attack of fever,
caught probably in the draughty shed where he worked
at his steamer. Being almost incapacitated himself,
Mr. Deekes sent to the French priests at Ukumbi for
help, but it arrived too late. Mackay was four days
delirious, and on February 8, 1890, at II P.M., he closed
his eyes on this world, and entered into rest. During
those four terrible days did the needs of Africa—solici-
tude for the converts in Uganda, plans for the future
carrying on of the work, longings for fresh labourers——
press upon the brave spirit of the exhausted worker?
Did disappointment, uncertainty, and yet undying hope
succeed one another in that ever-active brain ? We
cannot tell. But He who ‘giveth unto His beloved
in sleep’1 lifted him quickly out of the struggle, and
bore him to rest and joy eternal. ‘Now,’ wrote an

' Psalm cxxvii. 2 (R.\".).

202 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

ardent friend of the cause, ‘szh the Lordjesus he is at
lhe head—quarters of the African Mission, and rejoicing
over the wonderful way in which God is making all
things work together for good.’

A coffin was made for him out of wood he had cut
for the boat, and at 2 RM. on Sunday he was buried,
the village boys and the Christians from Uganda
singing at the grave, ‘All hail the power of Jesus’
Name,’ in Luganda.

A burst of lament and of admiration followed his
death. The world woke up to see that a humble
missionary who has just passed away was a great man,
and worthy of being bracketed in the roll of fame with
those explorers whose names were first on its list.
Stanley had already recorded his opinion of him. And
Colonel Grant, the discoverer (together with Speke) of
the lake on the shores of which the missionary had
toiled, and where he had passed away, wrote :—

‘I had the utmost confidence in him, and looked
forward to the time when he would sail round the lake
in his own steamer, and when we should have him
amongst us to tell all he knew of that deeply interesting
country which I almost love, Uganda. . . . The blow
to civilisation in Central Africa which has fallen on us
is not easily repaired, for a score of us would never
make a Mackay.’

And Mr. Ashe, the one who knew him best in his
missionary work, having lived and laboured for three
years with him, writes in the preface to his book, Two
Kings of Uganda :—

‘How deep the loss of Mackay only those who
knew him‘well and saw his work can understand. He
was one of those few who look fearlessly forth and
seem to see the face of the living God. He never
despaired of any person or anything. Quiet he was,

LABOUR A/VD REST BY THE LAKE. 203

and strong, and patient, and resolute, and brave; one
on whom you might depend. He endured fourteen
years of Africa, . . . fourteen years of the contradictions
of men, black and white, fourteen years of dangers,
fevers, sorrows, disappointments—and in all and through
all he was steadfast, umnovable; a true missionary,
always abounding in the work of the Lord.’

‘ Farewell! But “farewell in the L01d,” brave healt,
Changes the word of sadness t0 “ Rejoice”

Though when our need is sorest you depart;
Though now no longe1 sounds your valiant voice:

Yet not in vain your years of “daily dying,’

Nor without fruit of Joy your seed of tears and sighing.

Darkness still covers deep your “darkest land,”
Like the scarce rent primeval forest gloom;

But with Nyanza gleaming close at hand
Our hearts assemble round your victor tomb;

And \-"0“ in Gods strength, for the Crucified

To win the land you loved so well, and loving, died.

And while the man who knew and marked your worth,
Stanley, is welcomed with due meed of praise;

\Vhile his just fame rings round the applauding earth,
Beyond the blue of these sweet April days,

I hear your far-off welcome from the Throne,

The Lord’s approving word, the voice of heaven—VVell done.’

ARCHDEACON MOULE, in T In: C/zurc/z Zlfisrz'onary Gleaner, June 1890;

CHAPTER XIV.
A NEW ERA IN UGANDA.

‘ Lift up your eyes, and look on the fields; for they are white already
to harvest.’———JOHN iv. 35.

IGHT days after the lamented death of Alexander

Mackay, the steamer Kaparthala reached Mom-
basa, bringing a party to reinforce the East African
Mission. Mr. Douglas Hooper, in greatly improved
health, and with a brave helpmeet at his side, the
daughter of the Rev. J. Baldey, of Southsea, had the
joy of bringing with him three devoted young men
from Cambridge, Mr. G. L. Pilkington, Rev. G. K.
Baskerville, and Mr. J. D. M. Cotter, to share his
labours in Africa. They had left England on January 23,
and three days earlier an interesting meeting had
been held at Exeter Hall, to bid farewell to them, as
well as to the party about to accompany Mr. Wilmot
Brooke to the Niger. The great hall was crammed,
and among those present were sixty Cambridge under-
graduates who had come up together to take leave of
their companions starting for the Mission Field.

The exact destination of the East African party was
not fixed. ‘It might,’ Mr. Hooper remarked, ‘be
Uganda, it might be Kavirondo, it might be Ulu.’ It
was uncertain whether a party for Uganda would find
it possible to proceed by the old route. The advance

204r

A NEW ERA [N UGANDA. 205

of the British East Africa Company promised a door
for labour in the vast lands stretching north—west of
Frere Town, but nothing yet was known of the arrival
of their agents in Uganda. The committee, in sending
forth the missionaries, could not but feel that rein-
forcements for the lake demanded their primary
attention. But the instructions were ‘to proceed to
Frere Town; there to wait and watch; to make all
possible inquiries regarding the several routes for
advance ; prayerfully, in the light of these inquiries, to
make such proposals to the committee as God might
lead them.’

It was actually four months before the party left
the coast for the interior. Following the instructions
given, Mr. Hooper waited until the right course seemed
to be indicated, when it was decided that the lake
should be approached by the old route. But while
preparations were in progress one of the party was
taken seriously ill. On April 27 Mr. Cotter was
seized with fever, and it quickly became apparent that
he could not accompany the Nyanza expedition. In
view of this disappointment Mr. Hooper telegraphed
home to ask for fresh men. After a week Mr. Cotter
became worse, and it was evident that he was passing
away. Mr. Hooper was in constant attendance on
him. A few days before his death he had his
‘favourite’ text, ‘The blood of Jesus Christ cleanseth
from all sin,’ cut out of his Bible, and kept it until
the end firmly grasped in his hand. On May I4 he
breathed his last—the tenth who had died for East
Africa.

And—so rapidly did shade and sunshine alternate in
the Mission—on the same day the successor of Bishops
Ilannington and Parker arrived at Mombasa. The
question of who should fill this post had been a subject

206 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

of much thought and prayer with the committee. At
length a letter from the Rev. Alfred Robert Tucker,
Curate of St. Nicholas’, Durham, inquiring if there was
an opening for him to work as a missionary in East
Africa, was followed by an invitation to him to take
the leadership of the party Who were to start for the
Nyanza. This was at once accepted. Meanwhile the
Archbishop of Canterbury, having had communication
with the committee on the subject, appointed Mr.
Tucker Bishop of Eastern Equatorial Africa. The new
bishop was known as an accomplished artist, Who had
exhibited at the Royal Academy. Since his call to
the ministry he had laboured devotedly among the
poor. And he had obtained great reputation as an
athlete, having ascended three mountains in the lake
district on a single day. On St. Mark’s Day, April 25,
exactly fourteen years after the dismissal of Mackay,
(Dr.) Smith, O’Neill, Wilson, and James Robertson, for
the Nyanza, the consecration of the third Bishop of
the Mission took place in Lambeth Parish Church, and
the same evening he started for his distant diocese.
But while the arrival of Bishop Tucker meant a ray
of sunshine for the labourers in East Africa, he himself
landed in weakness and in sorrow. Several of the
party on board the Ethiopian had suffered from violent
sickness, caused apparently by some poisonous matter
accidentally mingled with the food, and the bishop had
suffered severely. The death of Mr. Cotter was the
news that met him on landing. ‘Cotter dead!’ he
writes ‘Such were the tidings with which Mr. Bailey1
greeted me when he came on board the Ethiopian on
our arrival in Mombasa harbour. “Truly I had faintEd
unless I had believed to see the goodness of the Lord.”
“I was dumb, and opened not my mouth, for it was

‘ Accountant at Frere Town.

» \\
mnx)»

‘ - \ »

m;
23%

 

 

 

"Wm. ‘H

 

 

A

 

 

 

A NEIV ERA IN UGANDA. 209

Thy doing." These words only can describe the intense
anguish of my mind when with such tidings ringing
in my ears, and feeling physically weak and ill, I set
foot for the first time on the shores of Africa. The
ladies and brethren engaged in the work at Frere
Town, with the children and many natives, were
gathered on the shore to greet me. In solemn silence
we exchanged salutations, and then slowly the assem-
blage dispersed.’

That same day the funeral took place, and amid
torrents of rain the precious seed, one day gloriously
to unfold, was buried in the silent earth. ‘The grave,’
writes Mr. Bailey, ‘occupies a corner of ground near
the path, just shadowed by an overhanging tree.’ On
the coffin—lid was a text card bearing the simple words
‘ Jesus only.’ A telegram was sent home announcing
‘ Cotter at rest.’

The former telegram despatched by Mr. Hooper,
informing them of the illness of his fellow-labourer,
and begging for immediate reinforcements, arrived in
London on May 5, the first day of the Church Mis-
sionary Society Anniversary week. In it he asked
that men might be sent out by the next French mail,
which involved their starting the following Saturday,
May 10. The telegram was read out by Mr. Wigram
at the. preliminary prayer meeting at Sion College, and
afterwards at the service in St. Bride’s Church. By
10 o'clock the next morning four offers of service had
been sent in to him, and by Wednesday evening there
\\ ere five more. Out of these four men were selected,
Mr. J. W. Hill, of Cambridge, Messrs. J. W. Dunn
and J. V. Dermott of lslington College, who had all
been preparing for the ministry, and were to have
been ordained on Trinity Sunday, and Mr. F. C.
Smith, who had been trained for a lay evangelist. On

I4

210 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

Saturday afternoon a hastily-got-up meeting was held
at Islington College to take leave of them, and the
hall was so crowded that some had to stand outside
the open windows during the proceedings. The same
evening the four volunteers bade farewell to home
and friends, and started off for Marseilles to catch the
steamer, and a telegram was despatched to Frere Town
announcing their coming. ‘This,’ the bishop writes,
‘was the second great surprise which greeted me on
my arrival. Thankfulness is a cold word to express
the-joy and gratitude which I feel for this timely
reinforcement of our missionary band.’ ‘But,’ he
adds, ‘plcase remember that our craving for men is
an insatiable one; indeed, it grows by what it feeds
upon?

But there was yet more sorrow to come. In July
Bishop Tucker and his party were at Saadani, ready
to start for the interior. But here Mr. Hill, who was
not well When he arrived, became rapidly worse, and
had to be taken to Zanzibar, where he received the
utmost care and attention from Dr. Wolfendale, of the
London Missionary Society. On July 20 God called
him also to the home above, just one day before the
party started from Saadani for the lake. They were
to travel with Mr. Stokes’s caravan, and had to wait
some time till it was ready. Bishop Tucker remarks
(the day before Mr. Hill’s death): ‘Although this
delay has tried us very much, burning, as we are,
with impatience to be off, still we can trace God’s
providential hand in it. Had we moved up country
the day after we landed (at Saadani), we should have
had Hill sick in our camp, without a doctor, and
Without any means of transport to Zanzibar. In the
midst of trials, how helpful it is to number up one’s
mercies!’

A NEW’ ERA IN UGANDA. 211

The party which started on July 21, though dimin-
ished by the loss of Cotter and of Hill, was augmented
by another labourer, Mr. H. J. Hunt, who resigned
his oflice under the British East Africa Company in
order to join the Mission. They reached Kisokwe,
near Mpwapwa, on August 21, and after a short stay,
during which thirty of the converts were confirmed,
they proceeded onwards through Ugogo. Here they
were exposed to considerable danger, as the natives
showed some hostility towards the Germans who
were travelling with Mr. Stokes, and two German
soldiers were murdered. Mr. Stokes, however, man-
aged to come to an arrangement with the chief by
whose people this outrage had been committed, and
the danger passed over. On September 11 the bishop
wrote :—~

‘ We are all in good health and full of hope, greatly
cheered by our near approach to a country more
hospitable than Ugogo. The Master has indeed been
with us, keeping, strengthening, and comforting us at
all times. We expect to reach Usongo about the end of
September, and to be at Usambiro about October 21.
But we are in the Lord’s hands, and can calculate on
nothing, content to live a day at a time.’

The whole party were at Usambiro at the date named
by Bishop Tucker. They found that Mr. Walker had
left the place only ten days before, and gone back to
Uganda, whence he hoped to send canoes to take them
all across the lake. The bishop would gladly have
started at once, but there was no boat, that belonging
to Mr. Stokes being at the sole disposal of the Germans.
He accordingly set out with Mr. Hooper and Mr.
Deekes for Nassa. On this journey he had his first
experience of African fever, walking ten miles with his
temperature at 103°. Returning to Usambiro, he was

212 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

met with the sad tidings that one of the white men
had died during his absence. On hastening to the
Mission Station he found that Mr. Hunt had passed
away, and that his remains had just been laid beside
those of Bishop Parker, Blackburn, and Mackay. He
says: ‘I had looked forward to a career of much
usefulness for him in Uganda. But God's ways are
not our ways, neither are His thoughts our thoughts.
And doubtless it was said of him as of David of old:
“ It is well that it was in thine heart.” ’

The six weeks during which the missionaries waited
at Usambiro for the boat were altogether full of trial.
At the time of Mr. Hunt’s death Mr. Dunn and Mr.
Baskerville were lying low with fever. Mr. Pilkington
had also been attacked, but was recovering. On
November 20 Mr. Dunn passed away, and the bishop
wrote :—

‘I am only just getting over, I trust, my third attack
of fever; and I can, therefore, only add the sad, sad
tidings of the death of Mr. Dunn. . . . Oh! the sad
delay of the boat !’

Mr. Hooper was also stricken down, and the bishop
was attacked a fourth time by fever. In spite of this,
on the last Sunday at Usambiro Messrs. Hooper and
Dermott were ordained priests, and Mr. Baskerville
admitted to the office of deacon. When at length the
boat arrived the sick ones, including the bishop,
Who was nearly blind from ophthalmia, had to be lifted
in and laid down in the stern, and so in much weak-
ness the Mission party, consisting of five, set sail for
Uganda.

Mr. Dermott and Mr. Deekes remained behind, and
after planting a hedge of euphorbia round the little
‘cemetery’ containing the five graves of those who
laid down their lives at Usambiro, they left the sta-

A NEW ERA [N UGANDA. 213

tion in charge of a Christian Mganda, and started for
Nassa.

We must now go back and see what had been passing
in Uganda.

The country had suffered much from the long period
of war. The ground had been left uncultivated, the
Mohammedans had cut down the plantations, and
devastated the land generally. Food was scarce and
very dear, and the Christians often denied themselves
to give some help to the missionaries. At length, in
May 1890, the agents of the British East Africa
Company, Messrs. jackson, Gedge, and Martin, arrived
at Mwanga's capital. They brought a treaty with
them which they requested the king to sign, offering
protection and support in return for the taxes of the
kingdom. The Protestants were eager to accept the
treaty, but Mwanga, urged on by the Roman Catholics,
would not agree to it. The dissension between the
two parties went so far that both threatened to retire
from the country altogether. The Protestants, feeling
that they could not hold their own against the attacks
of the Mohammedans without foreign help, determined,
in case the treaty was refused, to go with Mr. jackson
to Busoga, which had already accepted the company’s
protection. The Romanists, on the other hand, knew
that they were not strong enough to maintain their
position alone, and declared they would take their king
with them, and find a home elsewhere. It was at
length determined that envoys should be sent with
Mr. Jackson to the coast, and that the English, French,
and German consuls there should be asked to settle
the matter, and that their decision should be final.
By the treaty, signed at Berlin in June 1890, the
spheres of German and British influence were distinctly
defined, and Uganda fell to the latter.

214. THE STORY OF UGANDA.

In August another victory was gained over the
Mohammedan army by Mwanga’s people, assisted by
the guns of the company. The rival king, Kalema,
was killed, and his body brought back and buried in
Uganda. Nevertheless in November, just after the
return of Mr. Walker from Usambiro, there was another
scare, and the king bade the missionaries prepare for
a new flight. But the Christians were again victorious,
and the danger passed over. The following month
Captain Lugard arrived with a small force belonging
to the company, and a fort was erected overlooking
Mwanga’s palace and capital, and the treaty was signed
by the king, placing his territory under the company’s
protection.

Owing to the political differences between Protestants
and Romanists, and the threatening attitude of the
Mohammedans, the erection of the church begun in
March by the Christians was somewhat delayed. But
by Trinity Sunday it was completed, and was at once
crowded by attentive congregations. Mr. Walker
having gone to Usambiro on the death of Mackay,
Mr. Gordon had his hands full. For some time school
was held every morning in the church by Henry Wright
Duta, for the crowds who were seeking instruction.
Mr. Gordon himself was busy with the candidates for
baptism, with translational work, with the sick, and
with all the thousand—and-one things that fall to the
lot ofa solitary missionary in charge of a station. A
‘committee for translation’ was formed from among
the Christians, all being ‘ men who had suffered reproach
for the cause of Christ.’ The Gospel of St. john, begun
by Mackay, was completed, and St. Mark was taken in
hand.

A fortnight after the advent of Captain Lugard, on
December 27, 1890, the third Bishop of Eastern

A NEW ERA IN UGANDA. 215

Equatorial Africa—the first to reach this distant goal
—landed in Uganda. The voyage across the lake,
which occupied twenty-three days, had been a tedious
and in some respects a perilous one. On one occasion,
a storm having suddenly risen, the wind caught the
mainsail, which the crew had tied to the side of the
boat, and before they had time to obey the order of
Mr. Hooper and loose it, the boat heeled over, and in a
moment more all must have perished. But in the good
providence of Him who watched over them the sail
gave way to the strain and split, and the boat righted
herself. The cool lake breezesbrought new life to the
sick and weak, and with fresh hope and courage they
set foot on the land so long looked forward to. As
they camped on the shore from time to time on their
way up Murchison Creek crowds gathered about them,
begging for books and for instruction; and Mr.
Pilkington, who had picked up some of the language,
was surrounded by eager listeners. At length they
reached Mengo, and on Sunday, December 28, Bishop
Tucker stood to speak (through an interpreter) to fully
a thousand Christians in the church they had them-
selves built. ‘It was a wonderful sight!’ he writes.
‘There, close beside me, was the leatz'lez'ro~the second
man in the kingdom. There, on every hand, were
chiefs of various degrees, all Christian men, and all in
their demeanour devout and earnest to a degree. The
responses, in their heartiness, were beyond anything
I have heard, even in Africa.’1

The following day the new-comers were received
by the king. They were welcomed with blowing of
trumpets and beating of drums, and their seats were
placed at the king’s right hand. A more interesting

‘ At Frere Town, and at Kisolme, Mpwapwa, where the bishop had
been much impres;ed with the heartiness of the worshippers.

216 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

interview was that held with the native Church Council,
at which the bishop announced a confirmation to be
held shortly, and gave the members earnest advice
respecting their own spiritual life.

The bishop was most anxious that the Church in
Uganda should be organised upon a sure basis, and
the foundation laid for a future native ministry. Six
young men were chosen to be set apart as lay
evangelists. Three of these, Henry Wright Duta,

lSembera Mackay, and Mika Sematimba, had already
refused chieftainships from the king because they
desired to devote themselves to the work of teaching.
The other three were Paulo Bakunga, who had been
the keeper of Mtesa’s tomb, Zacharia Kflizlito, leader of
the deputation which had waited on Stanley when he
arrived in Nkole during the residence there of the
exiled Christians, and Yohana Mwira, baptised in 1883
by Mr. O’Flaherty. Their maintenance was to be
undertaken by the Church members.

On January 18 the first ordination was held in
Uganda, when Mr. Gordon and Mr. Baskerville were
ordained priests. It was followed by the confirmation
of seventy converts, men and women. ‘Many of them,’
writes Bishop Tucker, ‘had suffered persecution for
the name of Christ. Many had been deprived of their
earthly all. All were deeply in earnest, and those who
prepared them and presented them were greatly struck
by their deep sincerity and heart devotion to the cause
of Christ. The lay evangelists were set apart on the
18th; and this service was followed by the administra-
tion of the Lord’s Supper to the newly confirmed. The
quiet solemnity of this service,’ writes the bishop, ‘I
shall never forget; the future of the Buganda Church
seems, humanly speaking, to be wrapped up in these
earnest, devoted men and women, who with quiet

A NEW ERA IN UGANDA. 217

reverence and gentle footsteps came forward to receive
of their ministers the elements of Christ’s body broken
and His blood shed.’

The stock of Swahili Testaments brought by Bishop
Tucker was soon exhausted. Men willingly brought a
sum equal to three months’ work in payment for one
of these precious books. A princess, sister of the late
King Mtesa, came one day to see the bishop. She
was by nature, he tells us, a taciturn woman, and she
sat half an hour in silence. At last she summoned up
courage to ask if she could have a Testament. On
receiving the volume her whole demeanour changed.
She smiled, laughed, clapped her hands. ‘I almost
thought,’ says the bishop, ‘she would sing; but at any
rate she told me that her spirit was singing within her
for joy.’

One of the matters that claimed the bishop’s care
during the short four weeks spent in Uganda, was the
misunderstanding between Protestants and Romanists,
which had reached a point threatening considerable
danger. He invited Pere Brard, the then head of the
Romanists’ station (Pere Lourdel having lately died),
to a conference, and the grievances of either party
having been written, they were carefully discussed, and
the event was an amicable settlement, at least for the
time, certain matters relating to property, which could
not at once be disposed of, being left to the adjudication
of the company.

The Christians provided Bishop Tucker with the
necessary supplies during his sojourn amongst them,
and would have been only too glad to keep him longer.
But he and his brethren felt that the right course was
for him to proceed home to England at once, to relate
what he had seen, and bring out fresh labourers to
occupy the fields for work opening on all sides. Ac-

218 THE STORY OF UGAADA.

cordingly, on January 22, 1891, he and Mr. Hooper
bade farewell to the missionary band, and to the warm-
hearted converts, many of whom accompanied him
some way along the road to the lake. Their last
morning on the shores of Uganda must be described
in the bishop’s own words.1

‘ We were astir before sunrise. The purple flush of
the dawn was brightening when there came, on the
stillness of the morning air, a sound which stirred our
souls to the very depth. What was it? From some
little distance, from a native hut which we could see
but dimly in the half—light, there came a voice from
one pleading with God in prayer; then came the re-
sponse; then once more all was still. What was the
meaning of it? These were the voices of Christian
men and women engaged before sunrise in family
worship. They were men and women who only a
few years ago were living in all the darkness of
heathendom. Could we, as we stood there on the
Uganda shore for the last time, could we have had
a more touching proof of God's work of grace in the
hearts of the people, and of the power of the ever-
lasting Gospel to change men’s minds, turning them
from darkness to light, from the power of sin and
Satan unto God ?’

Bishop Tucker reached England on May 3, but
before his arrival some of the reinforcements he had
come to ask for had already started for Africa. Mr.
Ashe had set out for his former field of labour, with
a party of five others. One of these had, like Cotter
and Hill, to lay down his sword at the very outset.
The Rev. G. H. V. Greaves died at Zanzibar just a
month after reaching Africa. He had been most care-
fully nursed at the Universities’ Mission, and was

1 In his speech at Exeter Hall on June 2, 1891.

A NEW ERA IN UGANDA. 219

buried in their cemetery, close to Livingstone's old
servant Susi. The words of John iii. 16 were, at his
own request, inscribed on the tomb of the fourteenllz
who had died for East Africa.

Meanwhile the Church in Uganda was not slow in
setting to work. Mr. F. C. Smith proceeded to Busoga,
to the village of the chief Wakoli. Two of the native
Christians commenced teaching in the village of Lubwa,
the chief who had murdered Bishop Hannington, and
a third started work in another place. Mr. Walker
went to Budu, a province south-east of Uganda, which
is in charge of one of the king’s great officers, the
[Jo/zinc, who is none other than the old Christian chief
Nikodemo Sebwato. With Mr. Walker were Mika
Sematimba and Yohana Mwira, and all three were
supported by the polez'no, Mr. Walker himself living
entirely on native provisions. A little church has
been built, and there is a good attendance at the ser—
vices. Native evangelists have also begun work in
Usukuma.

Much has been hoped for from the construction
of a railway from Mombasa to the lake, which was
commenced by the British East Africa Company in
August 1890. The project has, however, not yet been
carried out, owing to the enormous expense of the
work, if undertaken Without the support of Govern-
ment. But the cost of maintaining their position in
Uganda without an easier means of transit from the
coast was found by the company to be so serious,
that after much consideration they reluctantly sent
orders to their agents there to Withdraw. It was felt
by the friends not only of the Mission, but of Africa
generally, that this would prove a fatal blow to the
hopes entertained for the country. The agents of the
company were looked upon in Uganda as the repre-

220 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

sentatives of England, and their abandonment of the
land they had pledged themselves to protect would
produce an utter loss of confidence in the power and
good faith of the nation. The prestige of England
in the Dark Continent would suffer severely, even if
it were not hopelessly lost. Of the danger to the
missionaries and their converts in Uganda, who are
now unavoidably connected in the native mind with
the agents of the company, Bishop Tucker spoke most
touchingly in his farewell address at the Anniversary
Meeting of the Gleaners’ Union on October 30. A
totally unexpected scene followed. As the bishop sat
down, Mr. Eugene Stock rose to speak. He told
the meeting (we quote from the report in the Church
Missionmy Intel/z'gencer for December) ‘that the order
(for the withdrawal of the Company’s agents) had
gone out, and was probably not far from Uganda
at that moment. The company had so far “taken
their dividends out in philanthropy.” They could only
countermand the order if £40,000, the estimated cost
of maintaining their representative in Uganda for
another year, could be guaranteed in the course of
about a week. Individual members of the company
and their friends could pledge themselves to some
£20,000, if the Church Missionary Society could raise
£15,000. But the Church Missionary Society, as a
society, could not raise money for such a purpose,
though its members in their private capacity might do
so.’ An appeal had just been put forth in the names
of Bishop Tucker, Sir John Kennaway (President of
the Society), and General George Hutchinson (a former
Lay Secretary), and this was commended to the meeting.
The collection of course could not be utilised for the
purpose, but it was suggested that slips of paper,
naming amounts that might be promised, could be put

A NEW ERA IN UGANDA. 221

into the boxes as they passed round. The question
seemed to be at that moment trembling in the balance:
‘Shall Uganda be saved?’ and fervent prayer went
up that the answer from on high might be manifestly
given, and might go forth from that meeting. Yes!
And so it was ! Into those boxes went slips of paper
promising various amounts, larger or smaller. ,5 5,000,
:6 500, £ 50, were promised that night, together with
lesser sums, and a gold watch and a bag of rupees
were sent up to the platform, while one paper bore the ‘
words: ‘My four freehold plots of ground shall be
given for Christ.’

In a few days more other sums followed, and quickly
the telegram was despatched to cancel the order for
withdrawal, and save, not only Uganda, but the fair
fame of England, among the Africans.

Not that the work is done. There is the railway
yet to be constructed, and the construction of a rail-
way is, as was remarked in the Times of Septem-
ber 28, 1891, ‘the keystone of the whole fabric of
East African enterprise,’ and would be the surest
means of putting an end to the slave trade which
desolates those lands that ought to be won for Christ.
But a preliminary step has been taken in the sending
out of Captain J. R. S. Macdonald, R.E., in charge of
an expedition for making the necessary preliminary
survey.

Another important matter affecting the welfare of
Uganda and of the Mission is the placing of a steamer
on the lake. It is well known that this has long been
under consideration, and that a sum of money was raised
by friends for the purpose. The Committee of the
Church Missionary Society have decided not to accept
even the gift of a steamer, as they do not feel justified
in undertaking the responsibility of the annual outlay

222 THE STORY OF UGANDA.

required to keep it up. This, therefore, is left to the
company to provide. Meanwhile, we are told that a
German expedition has left Berlin with the intention
of laying out a dockyard and launching a steamer on
the Nyanza.

More directly connected with missionary work is the
sending out of copies of the Word of God to the people
who are thirsting for them. Swahili Bibles, and
copies of those books already translated into Luganda,
are eagerly sought after. And herein lies the antidote
to the teaching of the Romanist priests, who, together
with their converts, greatly outnumber the Protestant
missionaries.

The political differences between Protestants and
Romanists are very serious. The Protestants, having
helped to restore Mwanga to his throne, object, not
unnaturally, to the power being little by little mono-
polised by the Romanists, instead of being divided, as
at first agreed, between the two parties. Such of
them as have made a mere nominal profession of
Christianity are tempted to go over to the side of the
majority, and some have actually done so; and the
situation generally is fraught with much danger and
uncertainty.

What is in store for Uganda in the future we cannot
tell. The situation of the country and the many
admirable qualities of the people seem to make it a
fitting centre whence the light of the Gospel may go
forth to the nations around. Clouds indeed 100m
darkly on the horizon. But the story of the sixteen
years since the Victoria Nyanza Mission was first
proposed in 1876, is a wonderful example of the way
in which, with or without human instruments, God
carries on His own work, makes the ‘ wrath of man ’ to
praise Him, brings victory and gladness out of seeming

A NEI/V ERA IN UGANDA. 223

defeat and disappointment, and turns ‘the shadow of
death into the morning’!

Oh, let the message fly faster !
The time is speeding away,
And the thrilling voice of the Master
Speaks, ‘\\'ork while ’tis called to-day.’
Then send forth the news of gladness,
Let itsxechoes ring far and wide,
And joy shall banish all sadness
At the coming of harvest-tide ! S. G. S.

 

Printed by Ilazell, Watson, 8; Viney, Ld., London and Aylesbury.

 

 

A Selecz‘z'mz

FROM

THE CHTHLOGUE

gymzzd Mai

. _ I
flé’léfl .
w%%>@»fi>:«<:<)< €:2%7»

1110s! Boohscllcrs keep a stack of the Society’s numcrous and
attincli'ue Publications, or 171?} will procure them wilhin a short
time. But If any dzficulz‘y is c’xpcrz‘tnccd in ohiai/zing Ihc Publi-
catiuns, thqy will be flrwarded direct from the CHIEF OFFICE, on
rcccijn‘ 0f Ordcr, which should be addressed to
311'. RICHARD BRADSHA n',
56, I’ATERIVOSTER R0 I", LOIVDOIV.

Chcques and Post Ofice Orders payable to F. G. SARGENT (Cashier) .

 

 

 

 

 

El manbsome volume for [presentation
Price Fgfi‘ew S/zz’l/z'ngs, in lzcmdsome dot/z, gilt tap.

IN SCRIPTURE LANDS.

NEW VIEWS OF SACRED PLACES.

By EDWARD L. WILSON.

With 150 Original Illustrations Engraved from Photographs taken
by the Author.

lllllllllillIllllilllllill{lillliflilll'i"iHI1Hellllilllllllllllllll“llllll§ill}?lllllillililllllllllillllllill

“ Mr. Wilson has written a delightful volume. There is freshness
in the free and sparkling style, and, strange to say, there is freshness
in many of the subjects. Comparing the opinions of distinguished
travellers by the light of his personal experiences, his views on the
sacred sites are always intelligent and intelligible. A devout believer,
he is mainly guided by the sacred narrative and by geography ; but
he takes tradition for what it is worth, and it is often worth a good
deal in countries where everybody is eminently conservative. More-
over, Mr. Wilson is an admirable photographer, and the photographs
not only embellish the volume, but are sometimes a suggestive com-
mentary on the text.”—Saz‘ura’ay Review.

“Altogether, the book, which is very sumptuously got up, will not
only be of value to the inexperienced traveller in the East, but will
prove eminently helpful to all students of Holy VVrit.”—Pall Mall
Gazette.

“A notable volume in every respect, and an ideal gift in summer
or in winter.”-—-Exposz’!01y Times.

“ The work has so many independent qualities as to take a place
of its own, and contribute material of no small value. Many of the
illustrations reproduce places not to be met with in the ordinary
books ofreference, and in all of them the Choice of the point of view
helps the impressiveness of the scenes themselves.”~—The Scotsman.

“There is a two-fold charm in this volume; first, that of a well-
writtcn narrative of adventures in a country replete with interesting
associations ; and secondly, the profusion ofillustrations from photo-
graphs. 'l‘hc publishers have got up the work in the daintiest style,
and, taken all in all, ‘ In Scripture Lands’ is a valuable and delight—
ful volume."——Bn'tz'sh journal of Photography.

“ The volume is sufficiently handsome to adorn any drawing-room
table, but at the same time it possesses such intrinsic value for the
Bible student, that it might well be added to the library of everyone
who has charge of a senior Bible-class.”—~Rrwew of the Churches.

 

56, PA Igazvosrm ROW, Lemon;- and of all Booksellers.

 

3

 

 

EIGHT SHILLINGS EACH.

THE PEN AND PENCIL SERIES,

\IV \/‘~/\/‘\ mN-v

 

Imperial 8m, beautifully Illustrated, and printed on superior taper,
price 88. {It handsome clot/z, gilt edges ; or 288. each in morocco, elegant.

\NM'WW

 

 

M,

 

Australian Pictures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. By HOWARD WIL—
LOUGHBY. 85. handsome cloth, gilt.

Canadian Pictures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. By the MARQUIS OF
LORNE. 8s. handsome cloth, gi t.

English Pictures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. By SAMUEL G.
GREEN. D.D. 85. handsome cloth, gilt.

French Pictures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. By SAMUEL G. GREEN,

. 85. handsome cloth, gilt.

Greek Pictures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. By j. P. MAHAFFY, M.A.
Ss. handsome cloth, gilt.

Indian Pictures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. By WILLIAM URWICK,

A. 85. handsome cloth, gilt.
Irish Pictures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. By RICHARD LOVETT,
88. handsome cloth, gilt.

Italian Pictures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. By SAMUEL MANNING,
LL Revised, with additions by S. G. GREEN, D.D. Ss. handsome
cloth, gilt.

The Land of the Pharaohs. Illustrated by Pen and Pencil. By
SAMUEL MANNING, LL.D. New Edition, I‘EVlsed by RICHARD LOVET‘I‘,
M.A. 8s. handsome cloth, gilt.

London Pictures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. By RICHARD LOVETT,

85. handsome cloth, gilt.

Norwegian Pictures. Drawn with Pen and Pencu. By RICHARD
LOVETT, M.A. 8s. handsome cloth, gilt.

Pictures from. Bible Lands. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. Edited by
S. G. GREEN, D.D. 8s. handsome cloth, gilt.

Pictures from Holland. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. By RICHARD
LOVETT, M.A. 8s. handsome cloth, gilt.

Pictures frmn the German Fatherland. Drawn with Pen and Pen~
cil. By SAMUEL G. GREEN, D.D. 85. handsome cloth, gilt.

It‘lwm'nn I’Ietures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. By THOMAS MICHELE,
LIB. 85. handsome cloth, gilt.

Scottish Pictures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. ’ By SAMUEL G. GREEN,
D.D. 8s. handsome cloth, gilt.

Sea I’I‘etures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. By Dr. MACAULAY. 85.
handsome Cloth, gilt.

Swiss Pictures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. By SAMUEL MANNING,
LLD. 8s. handsome cloth, gilt.

“ Those Iloh/ Fields.” Palestine Illustrated by Pen and Pencil. By
5AMIIEL MANNING, LL.D. 85. handsome cloth, gilt.

l'uited States Pictures. Drawn with Pen and Pencil. \Vith a Ma and
one hundred and twent Engravings. By RICHARD LOVETT, l.A,,
Author m “ljlorxvegian icturcs,” “London Pictures," etc. 85. hand.
some cloth, gilt edges.

 

56, PA TERIVOS TEE ROI/V, LONDON; and of all Booksellgrs.

 

 

 

MAHOMET AND ISLAM.
A Sketch of. the Prophet’s Life from Original Sources. and a Brief
Outline of his Reli ion. By Sir WILLIAM MUIR, K.C.S.I. New and
EIslensed Edition. ith Seven New Illustrations and Map. Crown
vo. 53.

“ A sketch of the prOphet’s life from original sources, together withabrief
outline of his religion, so that the general reader is put in possession of
all the salient facts of one of the most remarkable of careers. Sir William
Muir gives an interesting appendix to his volume, in which he discusses
the Koran and tradition, the Observances and laws of Islam, and the differ-
ences‘bctween Islam and Christianity. He demonstrates the incomparable
superiority of Christianity in supp ing the wants of humanity, and in
havmg love as its motive power.”—- 1'

”165.
just Published. 105. 6d. cloth boards.

THE CALIPHATE:
Its Rise, Decline, and Fall. B Sir WILLIAM MUIR, K.C.S.I., LL.D..
D.C.l..., Ph.D., Author of “ he Life of Mahomet,” “ Mahomet and
Islam,” etc. Demy 8vo. 108. 6d. cloth boards.

“The study of Islam, stationary as it is, is a study which Englishmen
who represent, as Lord Beaconsfield used to sa ', a reat Mussulman power,
have no right to neglect, and in this study Sir il iam Muin must always
39 regarded as one of the most competent and authoritative guides.”~]lze

mics.

“ The volume does for the annals of the Caliphate something resembling
what has been done by Green, in his ‘ ShorLI-Iistory.’ for the annals of the
English people, and although it cannot be expected to arouse the same
interest, it makes a. literary pleasure of the duty laid it on the nation that
holds India and controls E 'pt of understanding the eginning and the
nature of the Moslem power. ’—~The Scotsman.

“ As the work of Sir William Muir this book has a special claim to be
received with respect; for he is the first English scholart at has written the
history of the Caliphs from the original Arabian authorities."—Salurday
Review.

THE BOOK OF PSALMS’. ,
According to the Authorised VerSion. Metrically arran ed with Intro-
ductions, various Renderings, Explanatory Notes, and ndex. Crown
8vo. 3s. 6d. cloth boards, red edges.
‘The best English reader’s handbook for the study of the Psalms yet
published."—Expositmy Times.

“ The introduction is a learned essay on the Psalms, which the student
will read with great interest, and the notes are elaborate and scholarly.”—
Scotsman.

“ We heartily commend it to the notice of Bible readers.”——English
Churchman.

“ The book will prove helpful to students, as well as suggestive to those
who read the Psalms as a devotional exercise."~—Christian.

“ We do not know any edition of the Psalter which, for popular use, can
be put alongside of this.”—N.B. Daily Mail.

THE TEJIPLE, .
Its Ministry and Services as they were at the time of Jesus Christ.
By the Rev. Dr. EDERSHEIM. Imperial 16mo. ss. cloth, gilt edges.

“The author knows the varied topics he discusses better than most
scholars in England. There are few who will not learn from a volume
which has the results, with little of the show of learning."—Athenwum.
SKETCHES OF JEIVISH SOCIAL LIIV‘E' .

In the Days of Christ. By the Rev. Dr. EDERSHEIM. Imperial I6mo.
ss. cloth gilt.

 

56, PA TERNOSTER ROIV, LONDON; and of all Booksellers.

 

 

 

BY-PATHS 0F BIBLE KNOWLEDGE.

"The volumes which the Committee of the Religious Tract Society is
issuing under the above title fully descrve success. Most of them have
been entrusted to Scholars who have a special acquaintance with the
subjects about which they severally treat.”—Atlzcnwum.

 

I7. The Life and Times of Joseph in the Light of Egyptian
Lore. By the Rev. H. G. TOMKINS. Crown 8vo. zs. 6d. cloth
boards.

16. The Races of the Old Testament. By A. H. SAYCE, M.A.,
LL.D. With Illustrations from Photographs by Mr. FLINDERS
PETRIE. Crown 8vo. 3s. cloth boards.

15. Early Bible Songs. By A. H. DRYSDALE. 2s. 6d.

14. Modern Discoveries on the Site of Ancient Ephesus.
By the late J. T. WOOD, F.S.A. 2s. 6d.

13. The. Times of Isaiah Illustrated from. Contemporary
Illonuments. By A. H. SAYCE, LLD. 25.

I2. The Ilittites; or, The Story of a Forgotten Empire. By A.
H. SAYCE, LL.D. 25. 6d.

1:. Animals ofthe Bible. By H. CHICHESTERHART. Illustrated. 35.

IO. Trees and Plants of the Bible. By W. H. GROSER, B.Sc.
Illustrated. 35.

9. Diseases of the Bible. By Sir I. RISDON BENNETT, M.D., Ex-
President of the Royal College of Physicians. 25. 6d.

8. The Dwellers on the Nile. The Life, Literature, History,
and Customs of Ancient Egypt. By E. A. \VALLIs BUDGE, M.A.
3S.

7. Assyria: Its Princes, Priests, and People. By A. ll.
SAYCE,M.A., L. . 35.

6. Egypt and Syria. Their Physical Features. By Sir J. W.
DA\VSON, F.(:.S., F.R.S. 3s.

5. Galilee in the Time of Christ. By SELAH MERRILL, D.D.
25. 6d.

4. Balfl/lonian Life and History. By E. A. WALLIS BUDGE,

.A. 35.

3. Recent Discoveries on the Temple Hill at Jerusaleyn. By
Rev. J. KING, M.A. 25. 6d.

2. FreslhDLight from Ancient Monuments. By A. H. SAYCE,
L . . 3s.

Cleopatra’s Needle. By Rev. J. KING, M.A. 25. 6d.

DR. EDERSHEIM’S BIBLE HISTORY.

Complete in 4 vols. I65. the Set, or in separate vols. as below.
I. The “'nrld before the Flood, and 5. Israel and Judah from Solomon

 

the l’atriarchs. 25. 6d. to Ahab. 2s. 6d. ’
2. The Exodus and V’Vanderings in 6. Israel and Judah from the SacrI-V
the \Vilderuess. 25. 6d. fice on Carmel to Death of
3. Israel in Canaan underdloshua Jehu. 2s. 6d. .
and the Judges. 25. 6 . 7. Israel and udah from their De-
Israel under Samuel, San-l, and Cline tot e Captivity, With full
I)a\'id,tothe BirthofSolomon. Scri ture Reference and Sub-
25. 6d. ject ndexes to the 7 vols. 3s.

“ Dr. Edersheim has succeeded in throwing a freshness of meaning over
these histories."—‘Irislz Ecclesiastical Gazelle.

 

56, PA TERNOSTER ROIV, LONDON; and of all Boc/esrl/crs.

 

 

 

THE MIDNIGHT SKY.

Familiar Notes on the Stars and Planets. By EDWIN DUNKIN, F.R.S..
F. _.A.S.,, Past-President of the Royal Astronomical Society, and late
Chief Assistant at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich. With Thirty-
two Star-Maps and numerous other Illustrations. New Edition. 85.
cloth, gilt top.

“Those little maps of the starry 5 aces far surpass, in clearness and use-
ful worth, all I have seen before in the planisphere way; no reader but by
help ofthem may find, with a minimum of trouble, the star he seeks. . .
Whv did not somebody teach me the constellations too, and make me at
home in the starry heavens, which are always overhead, and which I don‘t

ilhd'flljnozv to this day ? ”—THOMAS CARLYLE (referring to Ilzefirst edition of
is 00 ').

ELECTRICITY AND ITS USES.

New and Revised Edition. B ' JAMES MUNRO, of the Institute of Civil
Engineers. With numerous Eyn ravings. Crown Svo. gs. 6d. cloth.
“We have here a popular but 0 ear and correct account of electrical
science in all its various branches. A work of this kind was greatly
needed.”—jourmzl ofSct'ence.

I’IONEERS OF ELECTRICITY;

Or, Short Lives of the Great Electricians—Thales, Gilbert, Franklin,
Coulomb, Volta, Davy. Oersted, Ampere, Ohm. Farada , Maxwell. By
J. MUNRO, Author of “Electricity and Its Uses.” {Vith Portraits.
Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. cloth boards.

“In tellin the story of these lives, the writer virtually sketches the
history of e ectrical discovery from the earliest to the latest times. Mr.
Munro's work is thoroughly well done."—Globe.

“The stories ofthese lives are admirably told, and will be read with
gesh (interest alike by the scientific and non-scientific reader.”—Mancltester

Mar um.

11E ROES OF T]! E TELEG RA PH.

By JAMES MUNRO, Author of “Electricity and Its Uses,” etc. With
Portraits. Crown 8vo. 3s. 6d. cloth boards.

"’A YS A ND III EA N S ,-

Or, Voices from the Highways and Hedges. A Series of Sketches on
Social Subjects. By ISABELLA Frvu: MAYO, Author of “The Occu-
pations ofa Retired Life," etc. Imperial 16mo. 55. cloth, gilt edges.

“ At almost every age we are disposed to sto and exclaim, ‘ How true
and wise this is!’ 'Phere is a deep, sound underlying rinciple throughout,
and the suggestions are such that all concerned with iomes as a means 01
influencing others may well be helped by readingr it.”—Guardi¢m.

THE BROOK AND ITS BANIKS.

By the Rev. J. G. W001), M.A. \Vith many Illustrations. Imperial
16mo. 65. cloth boards, gilt edges.
“A charminifl -written series of chapters in natural history. A reader
of the book wi [be instructed without knowing it."——Scotsman.
“A nicer book for b0 '5 than this it would be hard to imagine.”—Speclalor.
“ No more delightfu book can be cited among the writings of its lamented
author.”—Saturz?ay Review.

THE HANDY NATURAL HISTORY.

By the Rev. J. G. WOOD, M.A.. Author of “ Homes Without Hands,”
etc. With 224 Engravings. Small 4to. 85. cloth boards.'gilt edges.

“ A handsome volume in which the author, a well-known naturalist, tells
his readers, in simple, untechnical language, the habits and nature of birds.
beasts, and reptiles. Mr. Wood’s style is excellently adapted for attracting
the interest and insuring the attention of even ordinarily careless readers.
—Tlxe Illail.

 

\ 56, PA TERNOSTER ROW, LONDON; and of all Booksellers.

 

 

 

NEW POPULAR ANNUALS.

THESE ANNUALS form a. most acceptable Series of Gift Books. They

contain Serial Stories by well-known 'W 'itcrs, which, when
published separately,will sell for nearly as much each as is now asked
for the Volumes containing several of them. Besides Stories and most
useful, interesting, and instructive general Articles, there is a. pro-
fusion of Illustrations, and a. very attractive binding. No cheaper

gift-books can be had.
_...09°.._

THE

LEISURE HOUR ANNUAL.

“ Behold in these what leisure hours demand :
Amusement and true knowledge hand in hand.“

THE VOLUME of this Monthly Magazine for Family and General Reading
contains 850 Imperial 8vo pages of interesting readin , with numerous Illus—
trations by eminent Artists. It forms a handsome 001; for Presentation,
and an appropriate and instructive volume for a School or College Prize.

Price 73. in cloth boards.
__..oéo-._

THE

SUNDAY AT HOME ANNUAL.

THIS VOLUME forms a very suitable Book for Presentation. _It contains
828 pages, Imperial 8vo, with a great variety of interestin§t and instructive
Sabbath reading for every Memberof the Family. It is pro usely Illustrated
by Coloured and \Vood Engravings.

Price 73. in cloth boards.

_..o¢o-._
THE

BOY’S OI/VN ANNUAL.

THE ANNUAL VOLUME of the “ Boy’s Own Paper," containing 832 large
pages of'Tales of Schoolboy Life, and of Adventure on Land and Sea ; Out—
door and Indoor Games for every Season; Perilous Adventures at Home
and Abroad; Amusements for Summer and Winter ; and lnstructive Papers
written so as to be read by boys and youths. With many Coloured and
\Vood Engravings.

Price 83. in handsome cloth.

_..oeo.._e

THE

GIRL’S OWN ANNUAL.

Tm: VOLUME of “The Girl’s Own Paper,” containing 832 pages of
interesting and useful readinv. Stories by popular writers; Music by
eminent Composers; Practical apers for Young Housekeepers; Medical
Papers by a well—known Practitioner; Needlework, Plain and Fancy; Help-
ful Papers for Christian Girls; Papers on Reasonable and Seasonablc
Dress, etc., etc. Profusely Illustrated.

Price 88- in handsome cloth.

 

56, PA TERNOSTER ROL/V, LONDON; and of all Booksrllcrs.

 

8

 

 

MODERN IDEAS OF EVOLUTION
AS RELATED TO REVELATION AND SCIENCE.
By Sir J. W. DAWSON, C.M.G., LL.D., F.R.S., Author of “ The
Chain of Life in Geological Time,” “ Egypt and Syria, their
Physical Features in Relation to Bible History,” etc. Slxth
Edition. Revised and Enlarged. Crown 8vo. 55. cloth.

“ It embodies the thoughts of an eminent geologist on some of the chief
flaws and discrepancies in what he justly styles the ‘hypothesm' oi evo-
lution. If there is anything calculated to arrest the cocksure young
scientist, who is always the young man in a hurry, this book Will do It.
Perhaps nothing but a counterblast—and Sir William Dawson’s book IS
too well reasoned to deserve the term—can be expected to shake the un-
faltering confidence of the middlemen of science, who purvey Darwxmsm,

l

or what they consider to be Darwinism, to the intel gent multitude.”—
Saturday Review.

THE CHAIN OF LIFE IN GEOLOGICAL TIJIIE.
A Sketch of the Origin and Succession of Animals and Plants.
By Sir J. W. DAWSON, LL.D., F.R.S., President of the British
Association, 1886, etc. With numerous Illustrations. 55.
cloth boards. Third Edition, revised.

HANDBOOK TO TIIE GRAMZIIAR OF

THE GREEK NEW TESTADIENT.
Together with a complete Vocabulary, and an Examination of
the Chief New Testament Synonyms. Illustrated by numerous
Examples and Comments. By the Rev. S. G. GREEN, D.D.

Revised and Improved Edition. 8vo. 7s. 6d. cloth boards.
This well-known Handbook, which has passed through several editions.
has now been completely revised; additions and modifications appearing
on almost every page. Constant reference is made to the Revised New
Testament of 1881; and more especial] ' to the Greek Text of Drs. VVest-
cott and Hort. The Vocabulary has een entirely remodelled, and the

work in its new form is offered to Tutors, Classes, and Private Students,
in confidence that it will be found more than ever adapted to their needs.

IIISTORY OF TIIE REIV‘ORJIATION
OF THE SIXTEENTII CENTURY.
By J. H. MERLE D'AUBIGNE, D.D. Library Edition. Five
Vols. 8vo. Cloth boards, 205. the set: 305. half bound; 36s.
whole calf; 425. morocco. Cheap Edition. In one Volume,
with New and Complete Index. 85. cloth; 125. half bound;
155. calf; 165. morocco.
“I have revised this translation line by line. and word for word It
is the only one which I have col‘rectcd."—-_]. H. Mcrle D'Aztbignc'.
HISTORY OF THE JEH'A',

From the War with Rome to the Present Time. By the Rev.
H. C. ADAMS, M.A., Vicar of Old Shoreham. Svo. 85. cloth
boards.

This book aims at supplying the want that has long been felt for a brief,

consecutive sketch of jewish history from the destruction of Jerusalem
down to the present time.

 

56, PA 'I‘ERNOSTER ROIV, LONDON; and of all Booksellers.

 

9

 

 

\

THE GOSPEL IN SOUTH INDIA;

Or, Illustrations of the Religious Life, Experience, and Charac-
ter of Hindu Christians. By the Rev. SAMUEL MATEER, F.I..S.,
Author of “ The Land of Charity,” “ Native Life in Travancore,”
etc. With Illustrations. Crown Svo. 3s. 6d. cloth boards.

“ An unpretentious but touching narrative ofthe religious life, experience,
and character of the Hindu Christian. These pages are full of instances of
Gospel triumphs ; it will afford a highly encouraging study to all who help
in mission work."—Clzrisliau.

BUDDHISZII PAST AND PRESENT.

By the Right Rev. J. H. TITCOMB, D.D., First Bishop of
Rangoon. Crown 8vo. 3s. cloth.

“ Dr. Titcomb has seen Buddhism at close quarters, and has had oppor-
tunities of estimating its value as a factor in human life from practical
experience. He has compressed Within the limits of a quite moderate-
sized volume a great mass of information.”—S}>eclator.

HINDUISJI PAST AND PRESENT.

By J. MURRAY MITCHELL, M.A., LL.D. With an account of
Recent Hindu Reformers, and a brief comparison between
Hinduism and Christianity. Crown 8vo. 4s. cloth.
“Apraiseworthy attempt to present a popular view of a vast and im-
portant subject. The author’s experience and intelligence are equally

reflected in his concise. and clear statement of the various niodcrn move-
ments among the religious bodies throughout Iiidia.”——Satm'day Review.

PIONEERING IN NEIV GUINEA.

By JAMES CHALMERS, of New Guinea, Author of “Work
and Adventure in New Guinea.” With a Map, two Portraits,
and Illustrations, engraved by E. WHYMPER, from photographs.
8vo. 16s. cloth, bevelled boards.
“A very instructive volume. Mr. Chalmers has been at work for many
Itears in New Guinea as a missionary and probably no white man is better
nown there. . . . The book is one that should interest both the
student and the ordinary reader. Mr. Whyinper’s numerous engravings
add greatly to its beauty and value."——T1'mes.

OLD HIGHWAYS IN CHILVA.
By ISABELLE WILLIAMSON, of Chefoo. Illustrations and Map.
Crown 8vo. 5s. cloth boards.

“ Mrs. \Villiamson writes naturally, and with ease. She has much that
is interesting to say, and we have no hesitation in recommending her
book to those who Wish to read something new about an old subject."—
Salurday Review.

J OTTI NGS FROJI THE PA CIFIC'.

By W. WYATT GILL, B.A., Author of “ Life in Southern
Isles,” etc. Illustrated. 55. clotli gilt.

“These ‘jottings’ could only come from the pen of a writer who, like
Mr. Gill, combines considerable culture with long and intimate acquaintance
With the South Pacific_”—Academy.

 

56, PA TERNOSTER ROI/V, LONDON; and of all Booksellers.

 

10

 

MAN IN RELATION TO THE BIBLE cf: CHRISTIANITY.

A Special Volume of “Present-Day Tracts.” By Prebendary Row.
Canon RAWLINSON, Professors MACALISTER W. G. BLAIKIE, RADFORD
THOMSON, FRED. PFAFF, S R. PATTISON, Sir WILLIAM DAWSON, and
Rev. W. S. LEWIS. 3s. 6d. cloth boards.

NON- CHRISTIAN RELIGIONS.

Special Volume of “Present-Day Tracts.” By Sir WILLIAM MUIR,
r EGGE, Dr. MURRAY MITCHELL, and Dr. REYNOLDS. 25. 6d.
cloth boards.

NON- CHRISTIAN PIIILOSOPHIES.

Special Volume of “Present-Day Tracts.” By Dr. BLAIKXE, Dr.
NOAH PORTER, Rev. . F. WILKINSON, Rev. J. IVERACH, and Rev.
J. R. THOMSON. 3s. 6d. cloth.

THE IIIGHER CRITICISM.

Special Volume of “ Present—Day Tracts.” By the DEAN OF CANTER-
BURY, Dr. WACE, Dean Howsou, Dr. GODET, and Dr. BRUCE. 2s. 6d.
cloth boards.

JOHN IVYCLIFFE AND IIIS ENGLISH PRECURSORS.

By Professor LECHLER. With 3. Supplemental Chapter on the
Successors of Wycliffe. By the Rev. 5. G. GREEN, D.D. Portrait and
Illustrations. 8vo. 85. cloth.

“The importance of the biography cannot be over—estimated, especially
as the author had the immense advanta e of free and leisurely access to the
valuable Wycliffe manuscripts of the gmperial Library of Vienna. This
new edition appears with many additional advanta es. It is not only a
complete and closely-revised reprint of Dr. Lorimer s translation, but the
numerous and valuable notes have been printed in a form more convenient
for reference ; marginal summaries ofthe para raphs have also been intro-
duced, and aco ious index has been added. his work, which is excel-
lently produce , eminently deserves, as it will probably attain, a large
circulation.”—Times.

SHORT BIOGRAI’IIIES FOR THE PEOPLE.

Each with Portrait. ONE PENNY; or in Seven Volumes, each com~
plete in itself, 15 6d. cloth. Suitable for Family Reading, Sunday
Schools, Congregational Libraries, and Young Men s Associations.

SHORT BIOGRAPHIES 0F REFORZ’IERS.
Contains Luther, Calvin, Farel, Melanehthon, W'yclifl‘e, Knox, Huss,
Erasmus, Latimer, Tyndale, Bugenhagen, .[uan and Alfonso de Valdez.
With Portraits. Small 4to. 15. 6d. cloth boards.

ITALIAN EXPLORERS IN AFRICA.

By SOPHIA BOMPIANI. With Portraits and Illustrations. New
Leisure Hour Library. No. 3. Crown 8vo 2s. cloth boards.

\Vhen these articles appeared in the “Leisure Hour" they formedthe
first sketch in English of the part played by Italy in African exploration.
They have all been carefully revised, and in many cases enlarged by the
author, who, from her residence in Rome, has had exceptional opportunities
for getting reliable information.

CHRIST AND THE IIEROES OF HEATIIENDOJII.

By the Rev. jAMEs WELLS, Author of “Bible Echoes,” etc. With
Five Illustrations. Crown 8vo. Cheap Edition, IS. cloth boards.

 

 

56, PA TERNOSTER ROW, LONDON; and of all Booksellers.

 

I!

 

THE GREAT REST-GIVER.
By the late W. HAIG MILLER, Author of “ Life's Pleasure Garden,”
etc. Crown 8vo. 25. 6d. cloth boards.

LIFE’S PLEASURE GARDEN;
Or. The Conditions of a Happy Life. By W. HAIG MILLER, Author of
“The Mix-ave of Life,” “ The Culture of Pleasure,” etc. With Illus-
trations. (Frown 8vo. 3s. 6d. cloth boards.

“ The ingenious author of this work has written along series of chapters
on a multitude of circumstances, characters, and incidents. He has treated
all his topics in a cheerful and hopeful mood, and has freely introduced
zgiecdotes. The illustrations are numerous, appropriate, and good.”~—lea
~ucm.

"24 YS AND MEANS;
Or, Voices from the Highways and lied es. A Series of Sketches on
Social Subiects. B . ISABELLA FYVIE Limo, Author of “ The Occupa-
tions of a Retired ife," etc. Imperial 16mo. 5s. cloth, gilt edges.
“At almost every page we are disposed to stop and exelaim, ‘ How true
and wise this is.’ l‘here is a deep, sound underlyin principle throughout,
and the suggestions are such, that all concerned with: homes as a means of
influencing others may well be helped by reading it.”~Guardian.

THE NONSUC’H PROFESSOR IN 1115 SHERIDIAN
SPLENDOUR;
Or, The Singular Actions of Sanctified Christians. By the Rev.
WILLIAM SECKER. With an Introduction by the Rev. '1'. L. CUYLER,
Crown 8vo. as. 6d. cloth boards.

This is the reprint of a valuable seventeenth century book on practical
piety. It abounds in quaint and racy presentations of pointed practical
teaching, and is admirably calculated to quicken the conscience and to
train the heart.

THE LIFE OF JESUS CHRIST THE SA VIOUR.
For Young People. By Mrs. S. VVATsoN. With many Fine Engravings.
Crown film. 55. cloth.

“Mrs. Watson’s book is admirable. It tells the story with great sim-
plicity and ease of style; but there is evidence that difficulties have been
carefully considered,and much light is thrown upon those points which,
as they occur in the Gospels, are obscure to the unlearned reader.”—
Presbyterian Messenger.

THE LOVE OF CHRIST: HIS TO US, OURS T0 HIM.
By Rev. JOHN P. HOBSON, M.A. Small 8vo. IS. cloth boards.
The object of this book is to direct the thoughts of the reader in the most
pointed way to the greatest of all themes, the love of Christ to us as the
great stimulus of our love to Him.

BY THE REV. J. R. VERNON, ME.

THE HARVEST OF A QUIET EYE; .
Or, Leisure Thoughts for Busy Lives. With numerous Fine Engra-
vings. New Edition. 65. 6d. elegant] bound.
“1 never saw anvthing more gracefullyv or rifihtlz' done—more har-
moniously pleasant in text and illustration ’——ll[r. us '1‘”.
“ He should be placed next to Wordsworth on every student’s shelf."—
Standard.

RANDOJI TR UTIIS IN ('OJIJION TH I NG’S.
Occasional Papr-rs from my Study Chair. With numerous illustra-
tions by eminent Artists. Imp 16mo. 7s. bevelled boards, gilt edges.
“ It seems even better than ‘The Harvest ofa Quiet liye.’ ”—Mr. Ruskin.

 

 

.’ 56, PA TERNOSTER ROI/V, LONDON; and of all Booksellers.

 

12

 

HEROISMS IN HUMBLE LIFE;
Or, Stories from the Records of the Mont on Prize of the French
Academy. By L. G. SEGUIN, Author of “\X’alks in Algiers.” With
Illustrations. Small 4to. 55. cloth boards, gilt edges.

These stories, written by a gifted authoress, too early removed by death,
are based upon facts in the records of the French Academy. They depict
the deeds for which the Academy from time to time has awarded the Mont-
yon Prlze. and present a series of pictures of noble bravery, self-sacrifice,

 

and true Christlan charity.

THE GIRL’S OIVN INDOOR BOOK.

Edited by CI-IARLES PETERS.
fifty Illustrations.

528 pages, with over one hundred and
85. cloth, gilt edges.

Containing practical help to Girls in all matters relatin to their material

comfort and moral well-being.

Grosvenor, John C.
Sophia Caulfeild, and many others.

By the Author of “
thou h Married," Dora de Blaquiere, Dora l-I
Mac arren, Lady Lindsay, Ernst Pauer
Staples, Canon

ow to be Happy
0 e, Marie Karger, Lady
Sir John tainer, the Hon. Victoria
lemmg, “Medicus,” Ruth Lamb,

THE GIRL’S OIVN OUTDOOR BOOK.
Containing Practical Help on Subjects relating to Girl-Life when out

of doors or when absent irom the Family Circle.

Edited by CHARLES

PETERS. Profusely Illustrated. 528 pages. 85. cloth boards, gilt edges.

INDOOR GAflIES AIVD RECREATIOIVS.
A Popular L‘ncyclopaedia for Boys. Edited bv G. A. HUTCHISON. In-
cluding chafiers by j. N. Maskclyne, Lieut.-Col. Cuthell, Dr. Gordon

Stables, R. Rev. A. N. Malan, M.A., C. Stansfield-Hicks, Dr.
Stradlind, and others. With many engravings. 4to. A splendid Gift-
book or I’rize for Boys. 528 pages. 85. cloth boards, gilt edges.

“No more valuable gift-book could be chosen for young people with

active brains."—Saturday Revzew.

H O)! E 11A NDIC’RA FTS.
Edited by CHARLES PETERS,
Editor ot “The Girl’s Own
Indoor Book,” etc. Illustrated.
25. 6d. cloth, gilt edges.

THE TWIN HOUSES,
And other Stories. By ANNE
BEALE, Author of “The Queen
0' the Ma ," etc Illustrated.
25. 6d. clot boards.

THE SHEPHERD’S FAIRY.
Bv DARLEY DALE, Author ot‘
“')1"he Great Auk’s Eggs."
2s. 6d. cloth boards.

AUNT DIAIVA.
By ROSA NOUCHETTE CAREY,
Author of “Not Like Other
Girls," “Esther Cameron's
Story," etc. Illustrated. 25. 6d.
cloth boards.

THE JIASTER’S SERVICE.
A Practical Guide for Girls.
B Lady BRABAZON, DORA
I'I‘gl’E, ALICE KING, and MARY

SELwoon. 25. 6d. cloth.

 

SERVA NTS AND SERVICE.
By RUTII LAMB, Author of
“ Comfortable Mrs. Crook," etc.
IS. 6d. cloth boards.
HER OBJECT IN LIFE.
By ISABELLA FYVIE MAYO.
25. 6d. cloth boards.
THE SUNBEA )1 OF
THE FACTORY.
And other Stories. 25. 6d. cloth
boards.
ESTIIER CAMERON’S
STORY.
By ROSA N. CAREY. 3s. 6d
cloth boards.

SE YEN 1’ 'A RS
FOR RACHEL.
By ANNE BEALE. 3s. 6d. cloth
boards.

A Ll) YT II'S IIYIIE'RITA IVCE
By EULANTON THORNE. 3S. 6d.
cloth boards.

IN THE DA YS OF JIOZA RT
The Storv of a Young Musician.
By LILY WATSON. 25. 6d. cloth
boards.

 

56, PA TERNOSTER ROI'V, LONDON; and of all Booksellers.

 

I3

 

 

I

THE ROMANCE OF REAL LIFE.
True Incidents in the Lives of the Great and Good. Profusely Illus‘
trated. Large 4to. 3s. 6d., cloth, gilt edges.

“ ‘The Romance of Real Life,’ should be put into the hands of young
people. It is ‘ written down to them,’ and shows once again that truth is
stranger than fiction. The book is well illustrated—and what is a great
consideration in looking for prizes—there is plenty of it for the money.”—
Illcllzodist Times.

THE "'IRE ABID THE IVA VE;
Or. Cablc~l.aying in the Coral Seas. A Tale of the Submarine Tele-
graph. By J. MUNRO. With Illustrations. 35. 6d. Cloth, gilt edges.

OUR HOJIE' IN THE SILVER "’E'ST.
A Story of Struggle and Adventure in the Argentine Republic. By
GORDON STABLES, C.M., M.D., R.N. Illustrated. Crown 8vo. 3S 6d.
cloth, gilt edges.

ADVENTURES OF A THREE-GUINEA H'ATCH’.
By TALBOT BAINES REED. Illustrations. 35.6d. cloth.

FOOTBALL.
This Volume contains the Rules of the Game, with Papers on How
the Game should be Played, by such authorities as C. W. ALCOCK and
Dr. IRVINE. Illustrated. IS. 6d. cloth.

CRICKET.
By Dr. W. G. GRACE. Rev. J. PYCROFT, Lord CHARLES RUSSELL,
FREDERICK GALE, and others. 25. cloth.

.4 GREAT JIIISTAIKE.
ByT.S.MILLINGTON. With manylllustrations. Small 4to. 3s.6d.cloth.

THE FIFTH FORJI AT ST. DOJIIIVIC’S.
By TALBOT B. REED, Author of “ The Adventures of a. Three-Guinea
Watch,” etc. Illustrated. Crown 8vo. 38. 6d. cloth.

THROUGH .FIRE AND TIIROUGH "’ATER.
A Story of Adventure and Peril. By T. S. MILLINGTON, Author of
“ Straight to the Mark," etc. Illustrated. 35. 6d. cloth.

HAROLD, THE BOY EARL.
A Story of Old England. By j. F. HODGETTS, Author of “ Edric the
Norseman," “ Kornak the Viking," etc. Illustrated. 35. 6d. cloth.

MY FRIED?) SJIITH.
B . TALBOT BAiNEs REED, Author of “Adventures ofla Three-Guinea
Watch,” etc. Illustrated. Crown 8v0. 55. Cloth.

 

STEPPING STONES TO BIBLE HISTORY.

The style is such that the books can be read by children of eight years
old and upwards. They W111 also be found very suitable for reading to
very little children.

1. Stories frmn Gmwsis. By 3. Storir’sfro In th cLi res offlloses

ANNiE R. BUTLER. With Illus- and Joshua. ByJOSEPnJOHN-
trations. 25. 6d cloth. SON. Illustrated. 25. 6d.

2. The Promised King. The 4. Stories from. the Life of
Story of the Children’s Saviour. David. By the Rev. FREDERICK
ByANNIE R. BUTLER. With 11- LANGBRmGE, M.A. Illustrated.
Iustrations. 25. 6d. cloth. Crown 8vo. 25. 6d. cloth.

5. Stories of flu: Jewish Homes. By jOSEru JOHNSON and F.
LANGBRIDGE, M.A. With Illustrations. 25. 6d. cloth.

56, PA TERNOSTER ROW, LONDON; and of all Booksellers.

 

 

 

THE SUNFLOWERS SERIES.

The “ Sunflowers Series ” of Stories is for Adults rather t/zanfor Children.
The booksform very useful volumes for Birthday Gifts, and for Presentation

at all seasons to readers, say, from 1610 60.

hey are. m crown 82/0, with

Illustrations. pretty cloth covers, and with gilt edges.

Of All Degrees. By LESLIE
KEITH. 35.6(1.

Shag/Ming Castle. By ELLEN L.
DAVIES. 35.6d.

Ral 1h Ell Leon’s Opportunity.
y LESLIE KEI'III. 35.6(1.

JIareus l-Itratford’s Charge. By
EVELYN E. GREEN. 35. 6d.

Genevieve. A Story of Old France.
By the Author of “The King's

_ Service." 3s.6d.

The IIIanse of Glen Clunie. By
EGLANTON THORNE. 3s. 6d.
Two Enthusiasts. By E. EVERETT

GREEN. 55.

The Head of the House. A
Storv of Victory over Passion
and Pride. ByL. E. GREEN. 5s.

Chateau de Louard. A Story
of the Revocation of the Edict
ot‘Nantes. By H. C. COAPE. 55.

Joint Guardians. By E. EVERETT
GREEN. 55.

Joyee Graham '3 History.- or,
Overcoming Evil with Good. By
H. A. GOWRING. 3s. 6d.

 

Another King. ByJANE'rEDEN.

35.6d.

Ida Nicolai-i. By EGLANTON
TIIORNE. 35.6d.

The Old filanuseri’pt. A Ta'e
of the Huguenots. By B. M.
'MOGGRIDGE. 55.

Young Sir Richard. By H.

FREDERICK CHARLES. 55.

Maddalena. The WaJdensian
Maiden. Translated by JULIE
SUTTER. 3s. 6d.

Turning Points. By L. C. SILKE.
3s. 6d.

Roapisbg the Whirlwind.

~s. 6 .
OneJDay at a. Time. By BLANan
E M. GRENE. 3s. 6d.

The Mistress of Lgdgate.
Prim-2 . By EVELYN E.UREEN,
35. 6d.

The Two. Crowns. By EGLANTON
THORNE. 3s. 6 .

Lenore Annandale’s Story.
B 15.15. GREEN. 55.

Caro (1.1 By HESBA STREnox.
35. 6t .

Sunflowers. A Story of To-day.
By G. C. GEDGE. 3s. 6d.

HESBA STRETTON,

Author of “jessica’s First Prayer," e/e.

Alone in L!>H’l0n. 15.6.].

.1 jliserahlr Christmas and a.
Happy New Your. 0d.

.1 Night anrl a Day. 9d.

.1 Thorng Path. 25.

Belle‘s Charity. as. 6d.
Carola. 35. 6d.
Cassy. Is 6d.

Christmas (Thiltl. 6d.
Children of ('lorerley. as.
(.‘olnvelm and Fables. 5s

(‘rew of the Ilolphin. 15. 6d.
Enoch Itmlen's Training. as.
Iv‘ern's Hollow. 25.

lv‘ishers of Derby Ilaren. 25.
Friends Till Death. 9d.

IIou' Apple-Tree Court was
"'on. 6d.

Left Alone. 6d. -

Little Jleg's Children. 15. 6d.

Lost (lip. IS. 6d.

Jlaa' Kramer. 15. 6d.

filiehel Lorio's Cross. 6d.

No Place Like Home. IS.

Only a Dog. 6d

Pilgrim Street. 25.

Sa In .Fra nklin’s Savings
Bank. 6d.

The Storm of Life. IS. 6d.

The King‘s Servants. 15. 6d.

l'ntler the Old Roof. IS-

fl‘he Worth of a Baby. 6d.

Jeasioa'u First Prayer. 13.

 

56, PA TERNOS TE]? RON ', LONDON .' «mi of all Booksellers.

 

15

 

HHLF—CROWN BOOKS.

Each 384 pages. Illustrated. as. 611. in cloth, gilt.

33. The Days of Queen Blary; 17.1111‘ Own Choice. By RUTH
or, Annals of her Reign.
32. John Tineroft Bachelor 18: 16.TheAStor1/ of a Pocket Bible.
Benedict: or, ’ithoutlnten~ ByG. E. SARGENT.
ding it. By G. E. SARGENT. 15. Only a Girl "'1'fe.By R0111
31. The Holy 1" ar. By JOHN LAMB.
Bum \N. 14. Jlerle’s Crusade. By ROSA
3o. Chr istie Redfi rn’s Troublt s A

. REY.
13. The Story of a City Arab.
By AG. E. SARGENT.
12. A'rllflacse for Life, and other

29. Arthur (.lynn’s Chrishnas
Bo.r.1'1y RUTH LAMB.
28. The I’ih (r int 3 Progress. By

lo11N UNYAN.
:7. I’omponia, - 01, The Gospel 1n 11. Old Jtlanor House. By G.
Cms111' 3 Household. By Mis. E. SARGENT.
W1: 11. 10. Cedar Creel“ A Tale of Cana-
26. Ca 1min Cook. By W. H. G. d1an Lite.
111051011. 9. The Foster Brothers of
25. Luther and the Cardinal. 110011. A Tale of the Irish

By IULIE SIITTER.
24. Sunday 111 1-11 tugs atNorth-

Rebellion of 1798.

8. Within 31:111. Walls. A Tale

SARGENT.

20. Shades and Echoes of Old

London. By JOHN STOUGlr
TON D. D.

19. Fr 1111]. Layton. An Australian

Stmy. By G. E. SARGENT
18. 1/10 .111' dries. By Mrs.
P11055511.

 

oomt. BvG. E 5.1110131110111111 .

23. George 111mm,. By (2 E. 7. Among the DIongols. By
SARGENT. JAMES GILMOUR.

'2. Once upon a Time. Stories 6. The JlIountain Path. By
for Boys. LILY WATSON.

1. Riv/111ml 1111111141. By G. E. 5. Finding 11m- 1’Iaee. By

Howr: BENNXNG.

4. Adventures Ashore 10A float

3. Remarkable Adventures
from Real Life.

2. Strange Tales of Peril and
A drentu re.

1. The Black Troopers,
other Tales.

and

 

By Mrs. G. F. WHLTON,

Author of “ Christie's 01d Oigan,” etc.

TIIE IKING ’3 CUP- BExllfiER.
lhe Stmy oi Nehemiah for Young People. Illustrated. Crown Svo.
25. cloth boards.

The Jlusterious House. With ll asIRight. " Illusuatcd. 3s.6d.
l rontispicce by M. E. EDWARDS. cloth. 2i 1t.
C101111 8x0. IS. cloth boards. 0111' Oral ious Oueom P1ctu1es

"’1'11h-r’s Folly. 18Illust111tions.
Crown SW). 25. cloth boards.

Ch ristie’s Old Organ; or, Home,
S\\'('(‘t Home. IS. cloth

and Stones from Hex Majesty 3
Life. With many lllustmtions.
IS. cloth.

Taken or Left. Cr. 8vo. IS. cloth.

Angel's Christmas. 11.51110. 6d. .4 Peep Behind the Semws.
cloih. _ Illustrated. 1111p]. 161no. 3s. 6d.
Lquu-h the Lifeboat. \Vlth 44 cloth. gilt cdges.

Coloured Pictures or Vignettes. Crown Svo.
4to. 38. coloured cover.

Little ])ot. Colou1 ed Frontsp. 6d.

Little Faith; or, The Child of the
Toy 512111.15. cloth.

Olir'e’s Story,- or, Lite at Ravens-
c lifi'e. 25. cloth. gi t.

Nobody Loves Me.

Poppie’s Presents.
rs. cloth.

Saved at Sea. A Li<rl1tl1ousc
Stor '. New and Cheapcx Edition.
IS. c 0111 boards.

Shadows. Scenes in the Life of
an Old Arm Chair. Illustrated.
35. 6d. cloth, gilt edges.

 

IS. cloth.

 

56, PA TERNOSTER ROW, LONDON; and Of all Booksellers.

 

16

 

 

MHGHZINES

PER

EVERY HQFEE.

 

Sixpence Monthly. One Penny

Weekly.
THE

SUNDAY
AT HOME.

A FAMILY MAGAZINE
FOR SABBATH READING.

New Series. Sixpence Monthly.
THE

LEISURE
HOUR.

A MAGAZINE FOR
FAMILY & GENERAL READING

 

Sixpence Monthly. One Penny

Weekly.
THE

GIRLS OWN
PAPER.

Sixpence Monthly. One Penny
Weekly.
THE

BOYS OWN
PAPER.

 

 

 

Onc Penny Monthly, with Coloured
Plate.

THE

CHILD’S
COMPANION

THE MAGAZINE FOR LITTLE
FOLKS.

One Penny Monthly.

LIGHT

IN THE

HOME.

SPECIALLY USEFUL FOR
LOCALISATION.

New Series.

THE

COTTAGER

AND

ARTISAN :

THE PEOPLE'S OWN PAPER.

One Penny Monthly.

Fourpence Monthly. Halfpenny

\Veckly.

FRIENDLY
GREETINGS.

ILLUSTRATED READINGS
FOR THE PEOPLE.

 

 

OUR LITTLE DOTS.

THE ILLUSTRATED MAGAZINE FOR LITTLE CHILDREN.
Sixteen Pages, with Coloured Plate. One Penny Monthly. / .’

 

 

56, PA TERNOSTER ROW, LONDON; and qfall Booksgllers.

 

 

 

 
  
 
 
 
     
    
   
 
     

   

HOME USE
CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT
MAIN LIBRARY

This book is due on the last date stamped below.
1-month loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405.
6-month loans may be recharged by bringing hooks

to Circulation Desk.
Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior
to due date.

ALL BOOKS ARE SUBJECT TO RECALL 7 DAYS

AFTER DATE CHECKED OUT.

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

APR 1 5 2000

 

 

’ W
s;
17%;?
’4‘“-
'c. LD21—~A—40m—12,’74 General Library .
' ' . :.' ($270011) University of California

BEIKEIGY

//

. , fl/r3
r .. ,A

bflllfllWKllWlfl“||||\|\|||MIIHWIIWIIHIINill!

CDEHHBBDDI:

4, I‘M/”W \
‘ ’ //z “N N /

g ‘ - ) V S;
_ "fig/Eryn] 1‘

I)
\ ,o’wa -

  

/'

 

' BY

)
Sllustrateb JBooh5 ?

Mrs.
Author

0. F. WALTON,

of “CHRISTIE’S OLD ORGAN."

$1

J >//

—§

ANGEL’S CIIRISTMAS. 6d.
OIIRISTIE’S OLD ORGAN;

is.
THE VKING’S CUPBEA REE.
LA IV'NCII THE LIFEBOAT.

or. Home, Sweet Home.

'Wee

The Story of Nehemiah. 25.

LII'TLE I'AITH: or,

l’irtures or Vignettes.

in Y LITTLE CORNER.

35.

LITTLE DOT Coloured Frontispiece. 6d.

The Child of the Toy-Stall. is.
A Back for Cottage Homes. IS.
[5. 6d. ‘

With Forty-four Coloured +

M Y MA TES AND I.

THE )1 YSTERIOUS HO USE.

IS.

NOBO DI' LO I'ES' ME.

M ajcsty’s Life.

 

2 I’OI'I'IE'S PRESENTS.

A PEEP BEITINI) THE SCENES.

IS.

OLII'E'S STORY: or, Life at Raremclilfe. 25.

0!"? GRJ CIOUS QUEEN:
With many Pictures. 15.

Pictures and Stories from Her

35. 6d.

[8.

SJ I'EI) AT SEA. A

Lighthouse Story. IS.

TAKEN OR LEFT. IS.

"LIS I RIGHT? 35. 6d.

SIIJ IDOII'S. Scenes in the Life of an Old Arm—Chair. 25. 6d.
”'INTER’S FULLY. 25.

By LESLIE KEITH.
OI“ .ll.l. DEGREES. 35. 6d.
RILI’H ELLISON’S OPPOICTUNITY, and East and
West. 35. 6d.
! PUBLISHED AT 56, PATERNOSTER Row, LONDON;

 

And Sold by all Bookselltrs.

 

 

 
 

 

 

 

    
   

  

\ . . » ‘ A .\ . , , ‘ . .
. ‘ v . . ‘ . a 1: \
. . ‘ ‘ . r ‘ , x‘ .
. , .

 

 

‘ a!)L":¥.\i.‘i..ykz.a!.l(;i‘lslle11huiirliiyix ‘

 

1.1x